JP2017159165A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving game amusement by enabling a novel display mode of a pattern combination.SOLUTION: A slot machine 1 comprises: a plurality of rotatable reels 301 (301a-301c) provided with a plurality of patterns; lottery means for performing a lottery of a winning combination; reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels 301 with a predetermined start operation as a trigger, and stopping the plurality of rotating reels 301 at stop positions based on a lottery result by the lottery means with a predetermined stop operation as a trigger; and pattern display means for identifiably displaying a part of the patterns among the plurality of patterns provided in each reel 301 when the plurality of reels 301 are stopped by the reel control means by providing a basic display area (a pattern display window 524) which makes a part of each of the plurality of reels 301 visible.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a swivel type gaming machine (also referred to as a “pachislot machine” or a “slot machine”).

  In a general conventional swivel-type gaming machine (game machine), a plurality of rotatable reels with a plurality of types of symbols are arranged, and the state in which the symbols fluctuate as the reels rotate is shown in FIG. It is shown to the player side through a display window provided on the front side.

  In the display area in the display window, a display line indicating a combination of symbols (design symbol combination) is formed by connecting symbols stopped and displayed on each reel one by one. For example, in the case of a “3 × 3” display area in which three symbols are stopped and displayed on three reels, three in the horizontal direction (upper, middle, lower) and two in the diagonal direction (upward to the right, right) A total of five (down) lines are formed. Then, a privilege such as medal payout is given based on a symbol combination that appears on a specific display line (effective line) among the plurality of display lines.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, which display line is to be an effective line is predetermined for each gaming machine, and a gaming machine having a plurality of display lines or non-linear display lines as an effective line is also proposed. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-80068

  However, in each of the conventional gaming machines described above, the symbol combination is only displayed on the display line in the fixed display area, and the display mode of the symbol combination is limited. There was a lot of fear that the interest would not improve after getting used to it.

  Therefore, in view of the above-described problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest by enabling a novel display mode of symbol combinations.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention rotates a plurality of rotatable reels with a plurality of symbols, lottery means for lottery of a winning combination, and a plurality of reels triggered by a predetermined starting operation. A reel control means for stopping each of the plurality of rotating reels at a stop position based on a lottery result by the lottery means and a part of each of the plurality of reels can be visually recognized. By providing a basic display area, when the plurality of reels are stopped by the reel control means, one or more predetermined symbols formed by connecting symbols on each reel made visible in the basic display area And a symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination in the line mode, and when a specific condition is satisfied, a part of the symbols in the basic display area is shielded and the basic display And a line variable control means for executing control for changing a line mode in the entire area visible to the player by creating a symbol visible in an external area of the area. .

  According to such an invention, the line variable control means creates a symbol that can be visually recognized in the external region of the basic display region, thereby creating a new line mode using the symbol, and the conventional basic display. Since a part of the line mode in the area is shielded, the number of display lines visible to the player and the relative positional relationship of the display lines can be changed (change of the line mode). By changing the line mode as described above, it is possible to form a display area having a novel line mode. Therefore, it is possible to make a display mode of a novel symbol combination and enhance the player's gaming interest.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can improve a game entertainment interest by enabling the display mode of a novel symbol combination can be provided.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent board. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and the frame member in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member, connecting a connector. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is a figure for demonstrating the kind of design. It is a perspective view of the slot machine when the door-shaped front member is closed. FIG. 49 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 48. FIG. 49 is a side view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 48. It is a perspective view of the slot machine when the door-shaped front member is opened. FIG. 52 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 51. FIG. 52 is a side view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 51. It is a disassembled perspective view around a reel display device. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the upper frame region is open. FIG. 56 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state in which a region below the frame is open. FIG. 58 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 57. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the frame upper and lower areas are opened. FIG. 60 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 59. It is an enlarged view near the symbol display window in a normal mode. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine is equipped, an electronic device, an operation member, etc. It is a correspondence table | surface which shows the combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to each winning combination, and its game privilege. FIG. 64 is a diagram for describing a representative stop event corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 63. It is FIG. (1) which shows an example of the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of medals, etc. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows an example of the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of medals, etc. It is FIG. (The 3) which shows an example of the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of medals, etc. It is FIG. (The 4) which shows an example of the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, the number of payout of medals, etc. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is permitted at the time of BAR_1 winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of BAR_1 winning. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of BAR_1 winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of BAR_1 winning. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of BAR_1 winning. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of winning 1_A outside a frame. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of winning 1_A outside a frame. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of winning 1_A outside a frame. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of winning 1_A outside a frame. It is FIG. (The 3) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of winning 1_A outside a frame. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the condition apparatus which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of a weak cherry winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of a weak cherry winning. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of a weak cherry winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of a weak cherry winning. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the condition apparatus which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of strong bell winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is permitted at the time of strong bell winning. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of strong bell winning. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which an operation | movement is accept | permitted at the time of middle bell_1 winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the condition apparatus with which operation | movement is permitted at the time of middle bell_1 winning. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating an example of the stop aspect of the symbol at the time of middle bell_1 winning. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of middle bell_1 winning. It is FIG. (3) for demonstrating an example of the stop mode of the symbol at the time of middle bell_1 winning. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the symbol combination of the zero. It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a game state transfer control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of AT game determination processing. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view (No. 1) near a reel display window of the slot machine. FIG. 11 is an enlarged view (No. 2) in the vicinity of a reel display window of the slot machine. FIG. 11 is an enlarged view (No. 3) in the vicinity of a reel display window of the slot machine. FIG. 12 is an enlarged view (4) in the vicinity of the reel display window of the slot machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the identification aspect of the frame lower symbol in FIGS. 101-103. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st example of a change of a symbol display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the 2nd example of a change of a symbol display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the 3rd example of a change of a symbol display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the 4th example of a change of a symbol display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the 5th example of a change of a symbol display area. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a change of the symbol display area in which a basic display area is maintained. It is a figure for demonstrating the 1st example of a change of the symbol display area where a basic display area is destroyed. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the 2nd example of the change of the symbol display area where a basic display area is destroyed. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the 2nd example of a change of the symbol display area where a basic display area is destroyed.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol variation display apparatus. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 is the back of the slot machine FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another form, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing an exploded transparent plate and a light-emitting unit, 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member fitted with the transparent plate, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge bracket. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. 40 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member, and FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional perspective view, FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing an example of another hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the coupler is connected.

[1. Slot machine]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 of the present invention can be rotated in the shape of a side-opening door with a box-shaped outer body 100 whose front surface is open and a rotating shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 attached to the housing, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member 400 that is detachable from the outer body 100 and has an opening 401 on the front surface, and an optional And an image display 500 that displays the image of the above.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. In addition, a plurality of (in the embodiment, in the embodiment) the top plate 103 is located in a region facing the upper pier 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through-holes 132 are formed.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal releasing device 110 that releases a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and the medal releasing device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal release device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a medal storage hopper 110b to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply unit]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is likely to generate heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that sneaks one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a slightly protrudes toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s or the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is assembled into the apparatus case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If the inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door-shaped front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203, and a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (release command by settlement) of medal stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stops for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Button 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a publicly known switch that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip of the medal basket 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door-shaped front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) In a generally inverted trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw is passed through the through hole 214c (see FIG. 33 enlarged view) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed with respect to the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state, the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[3-2. Door-shaped front member-lock device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[4. Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

  In addition, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is depressed. To carry.

  The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the device case 302. Become. Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. A useable state in which fingers can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to a usable state in which fingers can be hooked from the obstructed non-use state of FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[5. Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, and A control board other than the main board 409 (for example, an effect control board 510 (see FIG. 44)) is also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later. On the other hand, the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are close to the wiring relay member 113. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. Thus, the case member 400 is straightly guided to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally formed on the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 while being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. The horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or a horizontal triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is a panel-type unit that can display an image, for example, which includes at least a liquid crystal display (or may be a plasma display or an organic EL display), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44). Note that the image display body 500 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge fitting 420. It is supported freely.

  As shown in FIG. 44, an effect control board 510 is assembled on the back side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the effect control board 510 can be integrally configured, the handling becomes easy, and the wiring connecting the two can be omitted, and the wiring in the case member 400 can be omitted. The complexity of the work space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the effect control board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability for the effect control board 510 can be remarkably improved.

[6-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of a long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e by a pin P1, and a short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f that is in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[6-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[6-3. Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 is projected in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction. The stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701a is in contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while being opened at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is an element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanisms as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the production control board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. is there.

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is attached by a finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle opening 422 is used to attach the top plate 406 to the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 protrudes in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. In addition, a frame member 501 that surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape, is integrally formed below the image display body 500. It is installed.

  Here, the frame member 501 is one of general components that provide a display area (reel display area / symbol display area) in which a player can visually recognize a part of the reel, and is provided by the frame member 501. The reel display area is fixed (see FIGS. 11 and 44). In this section, the description of the structure of the slot machine 1 using such a frame member 501 is continued. However, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a feature that “the reel display area (design display area) is variable”. In order to realize this, the slot machine 1 is not actually a fixed frame member 501 but a reel. A configuration (for example, a reel display device 520, which will be described later) having a function of changing the display area is used.

  The description of the frame member 501 is continued. According to the frame member 501 suspended below the image display body 500, a part of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c of the symbol variation display device 300 is visually recognized from the front through a window-shaped region formed by the frame member 501. Therefore, the symbols attached to the reel portion can be visually recognized by the player. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an electric decoration composed of a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control board that controls the light emission source, and a decorative member that is disposed in front of the light emission source and can transmit light. Is provided. Here, what combined the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is demonstrated as the front opening / closing member 90 (refer FIG. 44) below.

[6-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
A lighting device 502 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is illuminated brightly by the lighting device 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, when the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused over the entire surface, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted in the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only in the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 32 is a diagram in which the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is disposed on the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  When the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) since it is driven at a low voltage, the safety is higher than that of a conventional cold cathode tube driven at a high voltage of about 200V. ) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Multi-color light emission is possible, so the range of production can be expanded, (e) Combined with an inverter Therefore, there is a merit that it is lighter than the cold-cathode tube used, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer body 100. The main body 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a generic term for the case member side electric component). Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component (housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

[7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as “mounting board”). It may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed and free-movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Accordingly, FIG. As shown in Fig. 4, the movable member can move in the vertical direction and can move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[7-2. Wiring means-connectors 425 and 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electrical components are respectively connected.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Accordingly, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and then fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[7-2-1. Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member in a state before the model unit is mounted on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the model unit is mounted on the outer body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a heavy burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasure are high. is there.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is coupled to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. 5. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the model unit 50 is an object to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not an object to be replaced.

[7-2-2. Connector 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled. Thus, a board-fixed and inexpensive DIN standard connector can be sufficiently used.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors that are paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these connectors. The connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is connected to the board support member in the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A plurality of symbols are attached to an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body-side electrical components; In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board A connector connection terminal board, which is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed. The connector terminal board is divided for each connector and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other connector connecting terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by doing so. "
(3) In a gaming machine having “two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to the board support member via the connector board. In addition, another connector group that is paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder, and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the direction of connector connection. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board And a connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and the connector holder. On the other hand, a gaming machine characterized in that one connector in the connector group is fixed and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction.

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness. Even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409 and the like. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable is inserted into the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Thus, the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is a non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. This is because a large working space required for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because of facing each other.

  However, on the other hand, the connection part of the boards (main board 409, effect control board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 looks like it crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, the wiring work is better when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring cost. There is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

  Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 is not limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. 25, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island are connected with a wood screw or the like. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole formation).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Each reel symbol, symbol row]
As shown in FIG. 46, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a series of symbols (a total of 20 symbols shown by array numbers 1 to 20) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which the symbol is marked is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience. 46 shows the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached as the left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached as the middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached as the right reel. In this description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c may be described as necessary.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are arranged so that a predetermined number (for example, three) of the symbols arranged in each symbol row can be visually recognized by the player. (For example, see FIG. 61). The configuration of the slot machine 1 that allows a part of the reel 301 to be visually recognized will be described in the description of the reel display device 520 described later.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the types of symbols. As shown in FIG. 47, there are a total of 10 types of symbols applied to the reels 301a to 301c. From the top of FIG. “Replay symbol”, “Bell symbol”, “Watermelon symbol”, “Cherry symbol”, “Plum a symbol”, “Plum b symbol”, and “Plum c symbol” are prepared. In the following description, symbol names may be shortened and described (for example, “Replay” is set to “Lip”).

  How these symbols are arranged in each of the reels 301a to 301c (reel bands 321a to 321c) will be described. Referring to FIG. 46, “red 7 symbol” is arranged in array number 2 in the left reel 301a, array number 2 in the middle reel 301b, and array number 2 in the right reel 301c. Similarly, “blue 7 symbol” is arranged in array number 12 in the left reel 301a, array number 12 in the middle reel 301b, and array number 12 in the right reel 301c. Further, the “BAR symbol” is arranged in array number 6 in the left reel 301a, array number 9 in the middle reel 301b, and array number 17 in the right reel 301c. The “replay symbol” has 4 positions of array numbers 3, 8, 13, and 18 on the left reel 301a, and 4 of array numbers 1, 6, 11, and 16 on the middle reel 301b. In the right reel 301c, four locations of array numbers 1, 6, 11, and 16 are arranged. The “bell symbol” has 4 positions of array numbers 4, 9, 14, and 19 on the left reel 301a, and 4 elements of array numbers 5, 10, 15, and 20 on the middle reel 301b. In the right reel 301c, the elements are arranged at five positions of array numbers 4, 7, 9, 14, and 19. In addition, the “watermelon design” has three locations of array numbers 5, 10, and 15 on the left reel 301a, and 4 locations of array numbers 3, 8, 13, and 18 on the middle reel 301b, In the reel 301c, they are arranged at four locations of array numbers 3, 8, 13, and 18. The “cherry symbol” is arranged at array number 1 in the left reel 301a, array numbers 4, 14, and 19 in the middle reel 301b, and array number 20 in the right reel 301c. Yes. Further, “Plum a design” is arranged at two positions of array numbers 11 and 16 in the left reel 301a, array number 17 in the middle reel 301b, and array number 15 in the right reel 301c. Further, the “plum b symbol” is not arranged on the left reel 301a, but is arranged at the arrangement number 7 in the middle reel 301b and at the arrangement number 10 in the right reel 301c. Further, the “plum c symbol” is not arranged on the middle reel 301b, but is arranged at two positions of array numbers 7 and 17 on the left reel 301a and array element number 5 on the right reel 301c. The symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 46 is merely an example, and the total number of symbols arranged on the reel 301 (reel band 321) and the types of symbols are not limited to this. For symbols that are treated as the same type, such as plum b and plum c, the symbols are classified into the same type by having a similar part in the display mode of the symbols (for example, by making the patterns different). It may be easy for the player to recognize something.

[9. Reel and symbol display]
Below, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the display regarding the display of the symbol attached | subjected to the reel and reel is demonstrated.

[9-1. Reel display device]
As described above in the description of the frame member in [6-4], the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a feature that “the reel display area is variable”. In the following, the reel display device 520 will be described in detail as a configuration example for realizing such features. The “reel display area” is also a “symbol display area” for displaying a part of the reel 301 (individually, the reels 301 a to 301 c) and displaying the symbols of the array attached to the reel 301. In the following, the names are unified in the symbol display area.

  The reel display device 520 described below has an image display body 525 (the above-described image display) using a liquid crystal display panel or the like in addition to a frame-related component (in place of the above-described frame member 501) that forms a variable symbol display area. Instead of body 500). However, what is important in the present description regarding the reel display device 520 is the difference from the frame member 501 described above, and the configuration of the slot machine 1 described above may be applied to other configurations.

(1) Appearance of Slot Machine in Normal Mode First, the appearance of the slot machine 1 on which the reel display device 520 is mounted will be described. In each of the drawings shown below, components already described in the slot machine 1 including the frame member 501 are given the same reference numbers as described above, or the reference numbers are omitted as appropriate (for example, FIG. (See FIG. 45 and the like).

  48 is a perspective view of the slot machine when the door-shaped front member is closed, FIG. 49 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 48, and FIG. 50 is a side view of the slot machine shown in FIG. It is. According to FIG. 48, the reel 301 (reels 301a to 301c) is displayed in an area surrounded by the reel display device 520. 48 to 50 show the slot machine 1 in the “normal mode” in which the symbol display area is not changed by the reel display device 520. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a symbol display window 524 is partitioned by the reel display device 520 in the central portion of the slot machine 1 when viewed from the front, and one of the reels 301 (301a to 301c) has the symbol display window 524 as a symbol display area. The part is made visible from the front. The symbol display area by the symbol display window 524 at this time is a “basic display area”, and is represented by a broken line as a basic display area 524a in FIGS. 56, 58, and 60 described later. Although the details will be described later, the basic display area 524a has, for example, a shape of “three reels × three patterns” in which three consecutive symbols are displayed on each of the three reels (reels 301a to 301c). In the basic display area 524a, a total of nine symbols are displayed in a manner that can be easily identified by the player.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a perspective view of the slot machine when the door-shaped front member is opened, FIG. 52 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG. 51, and FIG. 53 is the slot machine shown in FIG. FIG. The slot machine 1 shown in FIGS. 51 to 53 is also in the “normal mode”.

  In the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 45, the frame member 501 and the image display body 500 are arranged on the symbol fluctuation display device 300 side including the reel 301 (more specifically, as shown in FIG. In the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 51, it can be seen that the reel display device 520 is disposed on the door-shaped front member 200 side. When such an arrangement is performed, the exposed portion of the reel 301 when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened can be widened, and work related to the reel 301 (for example, position adjustment or cleaning of the reel 301) can be easily performed. Can be expected. In addition, since it is possible to secure a wide space around the symbol variation display device 300 when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, operations such as taking out medals accumulated in the medal discharge device 110 and dealing with medal clogging are facilitated. The effect can be expected.

  Further, the reel display device 520 may be arranged on the symbol variation display device 300 side including the reel 301 as in the case of FIG. If such an arrangement is made, the weight and volume on the door-shaped front member 200 side can be reduced, so that when a hall employee opens the door-shaped front member 200 during hall operation, the physical load applied to the hall employee It is possible to expect the effect of suppressing the damage and the damage caused by the door-shaped front member 200 being bulky (collision with the player, damage to the parts of the gaming machine, etc.).

(2) Detailed Configuration of Reel Display Device Next, the configuration of the reel display device 520 will be described. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view around the reel display device. The broken lines shown in FIG. 54 indicate the positional relationship when the components are assembled. As shown in FIG. 54, the reel display device 520 is assembled to the door-shaped front member 200 from the rear side.

  Each component constituting the reel display device 520 will be described. 54, the reel display device 520 moves so as to shield or open part of the frame-shaped frame member 521 that forms a window-shaped region when viewed from the front and the region formed by the frame member 521. A movable frame 522 (upper movable frame member 522a, lower movable frame member 522b) as a possible accessory, and a display frame drive motor 523 (upper movable frame drive motor 523a, lower movable frame drive motor) for applying a driving force to the movable frame 522 523) and an image display body 525. The symbol display window 524 corresponds to a frame portion of the symbol display area and is partitioned by the frame member 521 and the movable frame 522.

  The frame member 521 is formed with window-like regions (upper window 521a and lower window 521b) one by one in the vertical direction. The upper window 521a is a display window for displaying an image, and the image display body 525 is assembled from behind. The lower window 521b is a display window for displaying the reel 301 arranged “rear” as the positional relationship when the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed state, and the left side of the lower window 521b is a left side member. The right side of the lower window 521b is partitioned by the right side member 521d. Then, the movable frame 522 (upper movable frame member 522a, lower movable frame member 522b) is assembled so as to be sandwiched between the left side member 521c and the right side member 521d. Further, the left side member 521c and the right side member 521d are formed with a groove in an assembly portion of the movable frame 522, thereby enabling the movable frame 522 to slide in the vertical direction.

  In the example of FIG. 54, the movable frame 522 is divided into an upper movable frame member 522a for changing the area above the symbol display area and a lower movable frame member 522b for changing the area below the symbol display area. Configured. The upper movable frame member 522a is a movable frame for opening the upper frame region. In the normal mode, the upper movable frame member 522a is disposed at a position where the upper frame region of the reel 301 is shielded when viewed from the front. The upper movable frame member 522a can move in the vertical direction by being supplied with driving force from the connected upper movable frame drive motor 523a. When moving from the normal mode, the upper movable frame member 522a moves upward to move the upper frame area. Open. On the other hand, in the case of the normal mode, the lower movable frame member 522b is disposed at a position where the lower frame region of the reel 301 is shielded when viewed from the front. The lower movable frame member 522b can move in the vertical direction by being supplied with a driving force from the connected lower movable frame drive motor 523b. When moving from the normal mode, the lower movable frame member 522b moves downward to move the frame lower area. Open.

  In FIG. 54, the movable frame 522 is divided into an upper movable frame member 522a that mainly opens the upper frame region and a lower movable frame member 522b that mainly releases the lower frame region. The number of the movable frames 522 in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment is not limited to this, and may be configured to be further divided into a plurality of movable frames, or may be configured by integrating them. .

  In addition, the size of the movable frame 522 (including the upper movable frame member 522a and the lower movable frame member 522b) needs to be at least suitable for the target area to be shielded / opened. For example, when shielding / exposing a line outside the frame for one stage across the reels 301a to 301c, a width sufficient to cover three reels and a height for one pattern are required. In particular, when the movable frame 522 is moved, if it is not necessary to cover the original position, the height may be as large as the target area of shielding / opening / closing, but the original position is to be covered. In view of this, it is preferable to secure a sufficient height in consideration of the amount of movement of the movable frame 522.

  The display frame drive motor 523 (upper movable frame drive motor 523a, lower movable frame drive motor 523b) is, for example, a motor that operates according to the control of the effect control board 510 (CPU 1118), and generates a driving force by the operation. The upper movable frame drive motor 523a is connected to the upper movable frame member 522a, and the lower movable frame drive motor 523b is connected to the lower movable frame member 522b. Then, the driving force generated by the display frame driving motor 523 is transmitted to the movable frame 522 that is the connection destination, so that the movable frame 522 moves according to the control of the effect control board 510 (CPU 1118).

  A transmission mechanism (for example, a gear) between the display frame drive motor 523 and the movable frame 522 is used to adjust the direction and magnitude of the driving force generated by the display frame drive motor 523 and transmit it to the movable frame 522. A mechanism or the like) may be provided. Further, the position of the movable frame 522 that moves in accordance with the operation of the display frame drive motor 523 may be notified to the effect control board 510 by providing a position sensor and transmitting a detection signal. In this way, it is possible not only to determine whether or not the operating position of the movable frame 522 is a normal position along the instruction of the effect control board 510, but also the position of the fixed frame member 501 and the position of the movable frame 522. In combination, the shape of the symbol display window 524 (that is, the shape of the symbol display area) can be recognized.

  In FIG. 54, one display frame drive motor 523 is provided corresponding to one movable frame 522. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of display frame drive motors 523 is not necessarily limited. The movable frame 522 may not have a one-to-one relationship.

  The image display body 525 is a display component such as a liquid crystal display panel, for example, and is connected to the frame member 521 with the display surface facing forward to display an image or a moving image so as to be visible from the front. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the image display body 525 is not necessarily required as a configuration relating to the change of the symbol display area. Therefore, for example, instead of the image display body 525, a panel or an accessory having no display function may be assembled to the frame member 521.

  As described above, in the case of the reel display device 520 shown in FIG. 54, the symbol display area indicated by the symbol display window 524 is formed by the fixed frame members 521 (left side member 521c and right side member 521d) whose left and right sides are not movable. The upper and lower sides are partitioned by a movable frame 522 (upper movable frame member 522a and lower movable frame member 522b) having mobility. And the structure of such a symbol display area does not change before and after the change of the symbol display area by the movement of the movable frame 522. That is, in the reel display device 520 shown in FIG. 54, with respect to the basic display area which is the symbol display area before the change, a part of the basic display area (of the boundary) is a movable member (specifically, The movable frame 522 (upper movable frame member 522a, lower movable frame member 522b)) is configured.

  Here, in the conventional slot machine, since the basic display area is composed of all fixed members, there is a restriction on the area where the symbol can be displayed, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom regarding the display of the symbol is suppressed. It was. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, a part of the basic display area is configured by the movable member. Therefore, by operating the movable member, the design is larger than the area by the basic display area. A display area can be expanded and the freedom degree regarding the display of a symbol can be raised. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “at least a part of the boundary of the basic display area” may be partitioned and configured by the movable member, and the location configured by the movable member is not limited. Therefore, all of the boundaries of the basic display area may be partitioned and configured by the movable member. In such a case, since the extensibility of the symbol display area is further increased, the degree of freedom regarding the symbol display can be further increased.

(3) Appearance of the slot machine when the symbol area is changed The slot machine 1 with the symbol display area changed is compared with the slot machine 1 in the “normal mode” shown in FIGS. Explain the situation. In the example shown below, the moving distance of the movable frame 522 (the upper movable frame member 522a and the lower movable frame member 522b) that is moved when the symbol display area is changed is a so-called one frame (one symbol in front view). Min). Such a degree of opening corresponds to “opening degree 3” described later.

  55 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the upper frame region is open, and FIG. 56 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG.

  In FIGS. 55 and 56, the upper movable frame member 522a is moved above the position shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, and the region above the basic display region 524a (the frame upper region) is released by the movement. As shown, the symbol display window 524 extends upward from the basic display area 524a. On the other hand, since the lower movable frame member 522b does not move from the position shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, there is no change in the area below the frame (frame lower area) of the basic display area 524a. By extending the symbol display window 524 in this way, in the symbol display area that has been changed, a new symbol (frame upper line) is displayed on the top row of each reel 301 (for example, FIG. 56). ).

  57 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state in which the region below the frame is open, and FIG. 58 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG.

  In FIGS. 57 and 58, the lower movable frame member 522b is moved below the position shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, and this movement opens the lower frame area of the basic display area 524a. As a result, the symbol display window 524 Is expanded downward from the basic display area 524a. On the other hand, since the upper movable frame member 522a does not move from the position shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, there is no change in the upper frame area of the basic display area 524a. By extending the symbol display window 524 in this way, in the symbol display area that has been changed, one symbol (frame lower line) is newly displayed at the bottom of each reel 301 (for example, FIG. 58). ).

  59 is a perspective view of the slot machine in a state where the frame upper and lower areas are opened, and FIG. 60 is a front view of the slot machine shown in FIG.

  59 and 60, the upper movable frame member 822a and the lower movable frame member 522b are moved outward of the frame from the positions shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, respectively. By the movement, the upper frame area and the lower frame area of the basic display area 524a are moved. As a result, the symbol display window 524 is expanded vertically from the basic display area 524a. By extending the symbol display window 524 in this way, in the changed symbol display area, a new symbol (frame upper line) is displayed at the top of each reel 301 and at the bottom. A new symbol (frame lower line) is newly displayed (for example, FIG. 60).

  As illustrated in FIGS. 55 to 60, according to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment including the reel display device 520, the symbol display area is changed by operating (moving) the movable frame 522 of the reel display device 520. Thus, the area outside the frame of the reel 301 is exposed. As a result, the player's degree of identification can be changed for the out-of-frame symbols located in the exposed out-of-frame region.

(4) Other configuration of reel display device The reel display device 520 is a configuration for making the symbol display area changeable in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. It is not limited to the component configuration. Hereinafter, other examples in which the reel display device 520 can be configured will be described.

  First, the number of movable frames 522 is not limited to two, and an arbitrary number may be provided, and the number of display frame drive motors 523 need not depend on the number of movable frames 522. (2) As described above.

  Next, in the above example, the symbol display area is changed by moving the movable frame 522 slidably assembled separately from the fixed frame member 521 by the driving force from the display frame drive motor 523. The reel display device 520 may not include the movable frame 522 as long as there is a part (a combination) having a function capable of changing the section of the display area. Specifically, for example, when the change pattern of the symbol display area is such that only the movement is performed without changing the shape before and after the change (for example, refer to FIG. 105D described later), the frame member 521. If the partition portion of the lower window 521b can be moved, the portion can serve as a substitute for the movable frame 522. Even when the shape of the symbol display area changes before and after the change, the frame member 521 can serve as a substitute for the movable frame 522 if the partition portion of the lower window 521b of the frame member 521 can be deformed.

  In the above example, the symbol display area visible from the front is changed by a physical operation of moving the movable frame 522 having mobility. However, the change of the symbol display area is not necessarily a physical operation. It may not be due to. That is, for example, it is conceivable to additionally arrange a transmissive liquid crystal in a part of the region outside the frame that can be changed by the movable frame 522. At this time, if the effect control board 510 or the like controls the energization of the transmissive liquid crystal to control the transmission / non-transmission of the transmissive liquid crystal in the arrangement area, the area outside the frame is shielded / opened by a physical operation of moving the movable frame 522. In addition, it is possible to shield / open the region outside the frame by an electrical process of adjusting the charge on the transmissive liquid crystal. As a result, the reel display device 520 can change the symbol display area as in the above example.

  However, in any case, the reel display device 520 requires a component having a function capable of changing the section of the symbol display area like the movable frame 522 in the above example. A description will be given assuming that the section of the symbol display area is changed.

  Next, the shape of the movable frame 522 will be supplemented. 48 to 60, the movable frame 522 (the upper movable member 522a and the lower movable frame member 522b) can shield / open the symbol display area with the same width across the three reels 301a to 301c. A rectangular member (or a shape similar to the rectangle) in front view was used (see FIG. 54). In other words, the movable frame 522 of the above example has such a shape that the horizontal “stage line” across all the reels 301 can be simultaneously shielded / opened with respect to the change of the symbol display area.

  However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display area that can be changed is not limited to the “stage line”, and the movable frame 522 having various shapes is used based on the change pattern of the symbol display area. Good.

  For example, when the symbol display area is changed, the reels may be changed with different opening widths for each reel, instead of the same degree of opening for all the reels 301. In such a case, the shape of the movable frame 522 may be adjusted so that the movable frame 522 can be moved only in a portion outside the frame area to be opened (for example, a “U” shape), or is fixedly shielded by the frame member 521. An out-of-frame region may be provided (for example, the out-of-frame region of the reel 301b is always shielded), or these may be combined.

  Further, the size (particularly the lateral width) of the movable frame 522 may be changed. For example, the horizontal width of the movable frame 522 is not the horizontal width (line width) straddling three reels as in the above example, but the horizontal width (reel width) of one reel, for example. If the movable frames having such a reel width are arranged so as to correspond to the reels 301a to 301c, the effect control board 510 or the like controls the operation of each movable frame, so that the symbol display area on the desired reel can be easily set. Can be subject to change. If it is desired to change both the frame upper area and the frame lower area, a movable frame having a reel width may be arranged for the upper and lower frames of the target reel.

  Up to now, only the opening of the out-of-frame area for one stage at the maximum has been described, but in the reel display device 520, by changing the moving width of the movable frame 522, the out-of-frame area for two or more stages is formed. It is also possible to open it. However, in such a case, it is a necessary condition that the size (particularly the vertical width) of the lower window 521b formed by the frame member 501 secures the maximum vertical width in the open state. Specifically, it is a necessary condition that the vertical width of the lower window 521b is larger than the sum of the vertical width of the basic display area 523a and the maximum movement width of the movable frame 522.

  In addition, when the change pattern of the symbol display area is such that only the movement is performed without changing the shape before and after the change (see, for example, FIG. 105D described later), the upper movable member 522a and the lower movable member The frame member 522b may be moved in the same direction and with the same amount of movement. Alternatively, as described above, the frame having a fixed shape may be moved.

  When a plurality of places in the symbol display area are changed, the operation timing of the movable frame 522 that changes the section of the symbol display area at each place is controlled by the effect control board 510. Here, “when multiple places are changed” means that when the symbol display area is changed on a plurality of reels 301, or even if only the same reel is changed, the symbol display areas are different at different places such as on and under the frame. Refers to the case where is changed. Since the operation of the movable frame 522 actually depends on the operation of the display frame drive motor 523 controlled by the effect control board 510, when a plurality of movable frames 522 are provided, the display frame is driven for each movable frame 522. Each movable frame 522 may be controlled to be operable independently by connecting a motor 523 or the like. In this way, by providing diversity in the operation timing of the movable frame 522, it is possible to diversify the operation patterns related to the change of the symbol display area, so that it can be expected to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the reel display device 520 may be provided with an indicator such as an LED or a segment on a surface that can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, an irradiator (irradiation means) that can irradiate the reel 301 or the symbol is installed so that the board surface blinks when the movable frame 522 moves, or the window frame of the symbol display window 524 after the movement is turned on. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that emphasizes the change of the symbol display area to the player. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, there is no effect that emphasizes a specific symbol combination that appears along with a change of the symbol display area with a backlight or the like. The effect of the irradiation means that can irradiate the inside of the symbol display area will be described in detail later.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reel display device 520 for changing the symbol display area can be realized in various configurations. However, in order to avoid complication of description due to various realization configurations, in the following description (especially, [12] described later) regarding the change of the symbol display area, the symbol display area changing means unless otherwise specified in terms of terms. Is unified and described as “movable frame 522”. That is, in the following description, when the symbol display area is changed by the movement of the movable frame 522 in the reel display device 520, the reel display device 520 has the configuration described in (1) to (3). The reel display device 520 is not limited to the reel display device 520, but includes the reel display device 520 having the other configuration described in (4).

[9-2. Symbol display window]
Below, the display mode of the reel 301 and the symbol in the slot machine 1 will be described.

  FIG. 61 shows an enlarged view of the vicinity of the symbol display window in the normal mode. The normal mode here means a reel display mode when the symbol display area is not changed by the movement of the movable frame 522, and most of the game in the slot machine 1 proceeds in the normal reel display mode. To do. Hereinafter, the symbol display area indicated by the symbol display window 524 in the normal mode as described above is simply expressed as “symbol display area” unless otherwise specified, and after the movable frame 522 is moved. When distinguishing it from the “changed symbol display area”, it is expressed as “normal symbol display area”. The “normal symbol display area” corresponds to, for example, an area in the symbol display window 524 shown in FIG. 61, and is a basic display area (a basic display shown in FIG. Region 524a). The details of the “changed symbol display area” will be described later, but for the portion of the “changed symbol display area” that extends outside the basic display area (outside the frame), Expressed as “region”.

  From the symbol display window 524 shown in FIG. 61, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where this symbol is displayed are “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), “middle (or middle position)” (for example, , A position where the “replay symbol” of the reel 301b is displayed) and a “lower stage (or lower position)” (for example, a position where the “bell 1 symbol” of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, in the symbol display window 524 shown in FIG. 61, “the number of reels × the number of stages (the number of symbols displayed continuously)” symbols can be displayed. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 524 from “the number of reels (3) × the number of stages (3)”.

  As shown in FIG. 61, a display panel that is visible to the player is formed around the symbol display window 524. The display panel is disposed in front of the reel display window 521 and may be a part of a frame member, for example. The display panel is provided with various lamps, of which BET lamps (BET lamps) 614 are labeled “BET1”, “BET2”, and “BET3”. The numbers on the BET lamps (numbers 1, 2, and 3 of the above “BET1,” “BET2,” and “BET3”) are the numbers of bets (the number of bets and the number according to the number of medals bet). It corresponds. In other words, “1” is 1 bet (the number of medals bet is 1), “2” is 2 bets (the number of bet medals is 2), and “3” is 3 bets (also called a MAX bet). The number of medals is 3).

  An effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 524, each symbol is not arranged on any one of the effective lines (that is, the predetermined symbol is displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the active line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not arranged on the active line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. As an example, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a game with three cards is specified or recommended in a normal game state (a specified number of three). However, in a specific game state such as a bonus state (for example, CB state), a game with one or two cards may be played (a prescribed number of one or two). In addition, the effective line is assumed to be a linear arrangement of middle stages (one middle stage line). Specifically, this corresponds to one line (middle stage line 623a) in which the arrangement of “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” is shown in the symbol display window 524 of FIG.

  The bet number and the effective line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 524. As another specific example, it may be arranged in a plurality of linear arrangements other than the middle stage, an oblique linear arrangement, or a mountain or V-shaped arrangement. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to one, and a plurality of effective lines may be set. Further, the number of active lines may be changed according to the number of medals bet in the game.

  The symbol combination on the active line displayed in the symbol display window 524 of FIG. 61 is “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” displayed on the middle line 623a, and this symbol combination is a replay role ( Since it is a symbol combination corresponding to (re-gamer), in the next game, an automatic bet is made without inserting medals, and the same game as the previous game can be executed again. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a symbol combination corresponding to each role, a symbol combination that is difficult to grasp at a glance which symbol combination is displayed on the active line is displayed. Also good. Specifically, for example, when the reel 301a is stopped in order from the left when winning the “watermelon_1” role, which will be described later, the conditional device “Lip 6_1” is activated preferentially, so that The symbol combination “bell-watermelon-bell” is displayed on the line 623a. In such a case, it is difficult for the player to know what role is won (or won) by looking only at the effective line, but if you look at the entire symbol display window 524, the watermelon appears on the line that falls to the right. By stopping and displaying the symbols so as to be arranged in a straight line, it is possible to cause the player to grasp the winning combination of watermelon (watermelon play).

  In addition, the display panel is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or flashed) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. From the top of the figure, these lamps are an error lamp 604 on which the characters “ERR” are drawn, a replay lamp 606 on which characters “REP” are drawn, which is located immediately below the BET lamp 614, and “STR”. A start lamp 608 with the letters “INS”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the letters “INS”, and a payout number display LED 612 having two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flashes) when any trouble or failure occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and indicates that a trouble or the like is currently occurring. Have a role to inform.

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of notifying the player that a game can be replayed (a game can be played again without betting a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or flash) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet, and has a role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 continues to light (or blink) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet), thereby having a role of prompting the player to place a bet.

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals paid out by displaying the number of payouts (number of medals to be paid out) when there is a payout of medals accompanying the game result.

[10. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 62 schematically shows configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are provided in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 409, a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like are mounted.

  The above-described single-load buttons 205 and 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409, respectively.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are input from these devices to the main substrate 409. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be rotated and stopped independently. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 524. Is displayed while changing.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In FIG. 62, the display frame drive motor 523 of the reel display device 520 is connected to the effect control board 510. As described above, the display frame drive motor 523 is a drive device for changing the position of the movable frame 522 that partitions the symbol display window 524, and operates according to the control of the effect control board 510. When changing the symbol display area, the effect control board 510 controls the movement of the movable frame 522 (specifically, the movement amount, the movement speed, the movement timing, etc.) and is necessary for realizing the movement. An operation instruction is given to the display frame drive motor 523 so that the driving force is supplied to the movable frame 522. Control data for the effect control board 510 to control the movement of the movable frame 522 is stored in, for example, the ROM 1120 and referred to by the CPU 1118. Moreover, the specific control content regarding the movement of the movable frame 522 may be determined based on, for example, the change location and the change degree of the symbol display area. The amount of movement need not be calculated each time by the effect control board 510. For example, a command indicating the level of the amount of movement is prepared, and the effect control board 510 transmits the command to the display frame drive motor 523. Thus, an appropriate driving force may be supplied from the display frame driving motor 523 to the movable frame 522.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the control source of the reel display device 520 (particularly the display frame drive motor 523 and the movable frame 522) is not limited to the effect control board 510. For example, other peripheral boards It may be configured to be connected to (a substrate other than the main substrate 409) and driven according to the control of the connection destination substrate. Further, for example, similarly to each component of the image display device 300 (for example, a drive motor and a position sensor of each reel), the image display device 300 may be configured to be connected to the main board 409 and operate according to its control. In any case, since the operation of the display frame drive motor 523 is controlled by the connection destination substrate (particularly the CPU), the movement of the movable frame 522 is also controlled by the substrate. Further, the substrate that controls the reel display device 520 may acquire position information regarding the position of the movable frame 522, and may further transfer the position information to another substrate.

  In the medal selector 207, the solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. The medal flowing through the return basket 213 passes through the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the payout medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the error lamp 604, etc. display an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal accumulation, so that the player, the hall employee, etc. are notified that the abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. The medal releasing device 110 receives a driving signal from the main board 409 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient or there are no medals in the medal releasing device 110, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409, and in response, the main board 409 informs that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. Is displayed on the error lamp 604, the image display body 500 or the like to notify the player or hall employee that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 1 includes an effect control board 510 in addition to the main board 409. The effect control board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 1126, a sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The effect control board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409, and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. The connection configuration in FIG. 62 is only an example in the slot machine of this embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a board other than the main board 409 (for example, the effect control board 510) may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. Specifically, information on the game managed by the production control board 510 (for example, information on AT and ART) and emergency information that can be managed by the production control board 510 (for example, malfunction or malfunction of the movable frame 522 etc.). Error information to be notified) can be output to the hall computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player rotates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the active line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). A symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed from the display content (the combination of symbols displayed on the active line) displayed in the symbol display window 524 when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (design combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the aforementioned effective line (middle line 623a) in the symbol display window 524.

  In this example, it is assumed that there is one effective line. However, if the slot machine 1 has a plurality of effective lines, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed for each of the plurality of effective lines. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed, medals of a quantity that is the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each displayed winning combination are paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per time. In such a case, if the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple active lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals will be paid out and the upper limit will be exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, the excess of the upper limit value is not divided into the next and subsequent games and paid out.

  In the following, when the combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines, the combination corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol) It is said that they have all the winning symbols.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 include “Red 7 symbol”, “Blue 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”, “Replay symbol”, “Bell symbol”, “Watermelon symbol”, “Cherry symbol”, “Plum a symbol”. , “Plum b design” and “Plum c design” have already been mentioned, but among them, “Red 7 design”, “Blue 7 design” and “BAR design” are compared to other designs. The design is easy to stand out and easy to identify. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. These symbols are easy to stop and aim so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 524 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push).

  These symbols are merely symbolic symbols (one symbol does not correspond to the winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. In the following, a combination of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 63 will be described.

[10-1. Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, a winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols (symbol combination) corresponding to the winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 63, 64, and 65 to 68.

  FIG. 63 is an example of a lottery table used for lottery of a winning combination. A lottery table (also referred to as a winning value determination table) shown in FIG. 63 is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. Although details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for a winning combination, and such a lottery is also referred to as “internal lottery”.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining a representative stop event corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 63. The stop outcome corresponding to the winning combination is determined based on a condition device that operates when the winning combination is selected. FIGS. 65 to 68 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 4) showing examples of symbol combinations and medal payout numbers corresponding to each condition device, and these are also stored in the ROM 1112 or the like in advance.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described below is assumed to have an AT (assist time) function using a push order small combination as an example of a function provided in the gaming machine. In a gaming machine having an AT function, whether or not an AT is won is determined by a lottery (AT lottery). If the result of the determination is that an AT is won, an AT game is executed. In the AT game, many medals can be acquired by teaching an appropriate pushing order that can be expected to pay out the most medals, mainly in the case where the pushing order small part is selected as a winning combination in the internal lottery.

  Further, to supplement the pushing order, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment uses three reels 301a to 301c, and therefore the pushing order (reel 301 stopping order) is “left-middle-right”. , “Left-Right-Middle”, “Middle-Left-Right”, “Middle-Right-Left”, “Right-Left-Middle”, and “Right-Middle-Left” exist. In the following description, the respective pressing orders are referred to as “left order pressing”, “left pinch pressing”, “middle order pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse pinching pressing”, and “reverse pressing”. Further, when attention is paid to the reel to be stopped first, there are three pushing orders. In this case, the pushing order is “forward pushing” in which the reel 301a is stopped first, and the reel 301b is first in the pushing order. These are called “intermediate press” for stopping and “reverse press” for stopping the reel 301c first.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a procedure for a stop operation for stopping the reel 301, a game in which a push order is not taught during a period when the AT game is not performed (non-AT) It is recommended that the reel 301a be stopped first (that is, the stop operation is first performed on the reel stop button 211a) “left press (“ forward press ”or“ squeeze press ”)”. Further, when a stop operation that does not follow the recommended procedure is performed by stopping the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c first, it is disadvantageous for the player such as temporary stop of the AT lottery. Measures may be taken.

  Referring to FIG. 64 for such a stop appearance in the slot machine 1, many of the winning combinations have a stop appearance according to the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211 (individually, the reel stop buttons 211 a, 211 b, 211 c). Have been made different. Such a difference in the appearance of the stop appearance is realized by setting priorities based on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211 for a plurality of condition devices that operate when the winning combination is won. Also, the symbols that can be drawn onto the active line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 at the time when the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211 (specifically, for example, a maximum of four frames). Depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), symbols that can be drawn and symbols that cannot be drawn are generated. As a result, the mode of the stop appearance differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device corresponding to the push timing is also set in advance. The operation relationship of such a condition device will be described later with a specific example (for example, FIGS. 69 and 70).

  In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared depending on the gaming state. For example, FIG. 63 shows a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state as an example of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. It is shown. These gaming states are controlled by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110).

  Here, the general state is a normal gaming state in which the bonus game is not established and the bonus flag is not established. In addition, the bonus internal state is a gaming state in which a bonus combination is won by internal lottery and the winning combination state of the bonus combination is carried over without shifting to the bonus state (that is, without starting the bonus game) It is. Further, the bonus state is a special gaming state in which a bonus combination is won by internal lottery and a transition is made based on the display of a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination, and is a gaming state in which a bonus game is performed. In FIG. 63, “CB (second-type special bonus)” is provided as an example of a bonus. Therefore, as a transition of the gaming state, after winning the CB in the general state and operating the condition device related to the CB, The game until the CB game is started after the CB symbols are aligned is controlled to the bonus internal state, and the game where the CB game is started is controlled to the bonus state. FIG. 63 is an example of a lottery table in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and other bonus games and gaming states may be prepared.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a winning probability (or a number) for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, and a lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is used. An internal lottery will be held. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line, which will be described later. A reel stop process is performed. When any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the active line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. Note that the winning combinations (portions 1 to 60) shown in FIG. 63 are set such that one or more condition devices are operated in different combinations at the time of each winning. In other words, all combinations of condition devices that operate for each winning combination are different.

  In addition, regarding the number of medals to be paid out based on the display of the symbol combination indicating the winning combination, not only can a different number be paid out for each winning combination, but also according to the gaming state and the number of medals to be played (specified number) Different payout numbers may be set. In the internal lottery, different lottery tables may be used according to the number of medals for the game. For example, in the present embodiment, the prescribed number is 2 (2) during the CB game (bonus state), and the prescribed number is 3 (3) in other game states (general state and bonus internal state). However, in other cases, for example, when it is possible to select a single-ply or double-pick game in the general state, a single-plot lottery table and a double-plot lottery table are provided. It is preferable to prepare it separately.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one condition device and a reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, if a plurality of reel control patterns are to be prepared for one winning combination, A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for the winning combination. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stop points (symbol combination stop mode) on the active line for one winning combination. In the following, first, the winning combinations shown in FIG. 63 are roughly classified by type, and an outline thereof will be described.

  The winning combinations of the combination numbers 1 to 30 in FIG. 63 are replay (replaying combination) winning combinations. At the time of winning the replay role, the replay condition device is activated, and a stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is allowed on the active line (for example, the middle stage line 623a). Step S5) of FIG. 92 is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, the symbol combination of the replay role is controlled to be displayed on the active line, and as a result, as a privilege of the replay role, in the next game, a medal is inserted again or a bet operation ( The player can bet automatically without performing the operation for inserting the stored medals, and can replay the same game as the previous game again.

  The winning combination of the role numbers 31 to 46 and 55 to 59 in FIG. 63 is a so-called “small role” single winning combination. When these small combinations are won, the corresponding condition device is operated, and the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is allowed on the active line, and the reel stop process is performed based on this. In addition, when a winning combination with a higher priority than a small combination is won, the stop display of the small combination may not be prioritized, which will be described later. As a result of the reel stop process, when a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to the medal payout is stopped (winned) on the active line, the medal payout according to the winning symbol combination (winning combination) is made. Done.

  The “bonus exclusive combination” with the combination number 59 is a lottery target only in a bonus state (specifically, during the CB game) controlled when the symbol combination “CB” is aligned. In FIG. 63, in the bonus state, the bonus exclusive combination is selected as a winning combination with a probability of 100%, and the corresponding conditional device is activated, so that after the reel stop process, the bonus exclusive combination wins and a predetermined number of medals are awarded. To be paid out.

  The winning combination “CB + Bell” of the combination numbers 47 to 54 in FIG. 63 is a simultaneous winning combination (duplicate combination) of the bonus combination and the small combination. More specifically, the bonus combination “CB” having a combination number 60 described later and any one of the small combinations “middle bell, right bell” having the combination numbers 39 to 46 are simultaneously selected as winning combinations. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously won, control is performed so that the small combination is preferentially drawn. Therefore, a representative when the winning combination having a combination number 47 to 54 is selected. The stop type is the same as the bell combination of combination numbers 39-46. As a result of the reel stop process, if the symbol combination corresponding to the medal payout stops on the active line (wins), the medal will be paid out according to the winning symbol combination (winner). Is called.

  Next, the winning combination “CB” of the combination number 60 in FIG. 63 is a bonus combination. When a bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, as in the case of other winning combinations described above, the corresponding condition device is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is granted based on the displayed symbol combination . Note that “CB” is a role that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the corresponding symbol combination in the winning game is not displayed (not aligned), the winning establishment state is carried over after the next game, and the symbol Until the combination is stopped, the game is played as a bonus internal state.

  In addition, if the result of the internal lottery is “out of” that no winning combination is selected, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination will be stopped unless the bonus combination is established. Never happen.

  Even if the result of the internal lottery is not “out of place” and any of the winning combinations is won, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is within the symbol display window 524 within a range in which the pull-in control described later can be executed ( More precisely, if a stop operation (operation to push the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is not performed at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming at being stopped on the active line 623a) The symbol combination corresponding to cannot be displayed. Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the winning combinations is won, as in the case where “out” is selected, it will be described later. In step S6, it is determined that the game result is lost. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game result is lost despite winning a winning combination, instead of randomly displaying a symbol combination of “out of”, the winning combination is displayed. Control is performed so that a predetermined symbol combination (stop outcome) indicating that the winning based on the winning is eliminated is displayed in the symbol display area. The symbol combination (stopping appearance) displayed at the time of the loss is hereinafter referred to as “zeroing (or zeroing)”.

  More specifically, the winning combination having a column labeled “Zero” in FIG. 64 determines whether the winning combination has not been pulled in depending on the timing of pressing the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. "Means a winning combination that can be stopped. Note that what is described as “separate” in FIG. 64 is not a “coarse” that makes it easier for the player to recognize the feature of the stop appearance, but a stop that is a combination of seemingly disjointed symbols. It means that the winning combination (so-called “breaking eyes”) is a winning combination that can be stopped. “Blurred eyes” are different from “zero eyes”, and details will be described later in the description of the role of bell.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given for the simultaneous winning of the winning combination. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, simultaneous winning of winning combinations can be set, such as winning combination “CB + Bell” of the combination numbers 47 to 54. Simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning roles are simultaneously selected in one lottery opportunity. For example, when a plurality of small roles (for example, a plurality of bell roles) are simultaneously selected, A small role may be selected at the same time.

  When a plurality of small roles are won simultaneously, the condition devices corresponding to the respective winning combinations in the game (winning game) are activated simultaneously, and a predetermined priority order (for example, “replay> small role> bonus) ”And priorities such as“ Replay> Bonus> Short ”) and reels are processed while the winning combination display is allowed, and the bonus is paid out according to the winning combination. Is called. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small roles, or the setting method of the active line, control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combination is won together. Awards are paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small role is a “non-carry-over role” that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game will not be carried over after the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, the medal corresponding to the winning combination is not paid out to the winning combination that could not be won in the winning game.

  When a bonus combination and a small combination are won simultaneously, a combination selected in such a combination is also called a duplicate combination. When a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously elected, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous winning of the small roles, and a predetermined priority order (for example, “ Reel stop processing is performed in accordance with the winning combination according to the winning combination symbol display according to the priority order (such as “Game> Small> Bonus” or “Replay> Bonus> Small”). Awards are paid out. However, for bonus combinations, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning game is not displayed, the winning combination status of the bonus combination is carried over until the bonus combination symbol combination is displayed after the next game. ". Specifically, CB is a “carry-over”. Further, the replay role and the small role (for example, the bell role) are “non-carry-over roles”. In this way, when a “carry-over combination” and a “non-carry-over combination” are simultaneously selected by winning a duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. When the symbol combination corresponding to “carry-over combination” is not displayed in the winning game, the winning establishment state of “carry-over combination” is carried over after the next game. However, in such a “next game”, when winning another small role, both the “carry-over” and “other small role” will be in the winning state. Since they are selected at different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles. In contrast to the simultaneous winning combination (duplicate combination), a winning combination in which only one combination is selected in one lottery opportunity is called a single combination.

  Note that, in the case of simultaneous winning, it is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop process which combination of symbols corresponding to which winning combination is to be displayed on the active line.

  The above is the outline of the winning combination shown in FIG. 63. In the following, for each type of winning combination (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination, etc.), the relationship between the winning combination and the symbol combination (stop appearance) explain in detail.

[10-1-1. Bonus role]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, CB is prepared as a bonus combination. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination ("blue 7"-"BAR"-"BAR" set) is displayed on the active line, the bonus game of the CB is performed in the bonus game state. Is executed. The bonus game is a game in which an opportunity is provided for the player to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games. In the CB bonus game, the game is progressed in such a manner that the prescribed number of games is set to 2 and a bonus exclusive role with 2 payouts is won, and the bonus game ends when a total of 40 or more payouts are made. . When the bonus game ends, the gaming state shifts from the bonus state to the general state. Although not used in this example, different types of bonus games such as BB and RB may be prepared in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the CB bonus game used in this example, a substantial increase in game medals cannot be expected, but by preparing different types of bonus games, a large amount of game medals can be paid out in a relatively short period of time. it can. For example, in the BB game (BB bonus game), a setting can be made such that the game is continuously executed until a total of 465 medals are paid out.

  As described above with respect to the gaming state, even if the CB combination is won, until the symbol combination corresponding to the CB combination ("Blue 7"-"BAR"-"BAR" alignment) is displayed on the active line. The CB bonus game is not executed, and the gaming state is controlled to the bonus internal state in which the established state of the CB combination is carried over. When the bonus internal state is controlled, if a replay combination or small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, when the priority is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”, the CB symbol combination is displayed even if the CB formation state is maintained as the bonus internal state. Opportunities to be obtained are limited to the case where neither the replay role nor the small role is won in the internal lottery (that is, the loss). However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the ratio of deviation in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state is set to be extremely small (1/65536). Therefore, in most games, there is no opportunity to display the symbol combination of CB, and the game state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state.

[10-1-2. Replay role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a replay combination (also referred to as a replay combination) is prepared. As shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the condition device that operates when the replay combination is won is a plurality of condition devices that are indicated by the name of Lip in FIGS. 65 to 68, and the condition device that operates according to the selected replay combination. And their priorities are different. When a symbol combination (for example, “Replay”-“Replay”-“Replay” assortment) corresponding to the condition device operated based on the winning of the replay role is displayed on the active line, the gaming privilege of replaying is given. Is granted. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to spend a new medal (add a new medal) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, even if the winning frequency is increased by increasing the winning probability, for example, there is little penalty for the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (general state), the probability of winning is about once in about 6 to 7 times (8980 / 65536≈1 / 7.3 in the general state of FIG. 63). As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  In addition, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are uniformly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used for the replay combination. By changing the number of other symbols (the symbols not constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role) arranged between the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to one to a maximum of four), It is possible to make it possible to align the pattern combination corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing.

  In addition, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a normal replay combination is displayed on the active line, a replay privilege can only be given. However, when the slot machine 1 is provided with ART or RT, it is special. If a combination of symbols corresponding to ART replay is displayed on the active line by setting a replay combination (for example, ART replay), it can function as a trigger for shifting to a gaming state such as chance RT. it can.

[10-2-1-1. Various replay roles]
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning combinations are prepared as replay combinations, and the symbol combinations displayed in the symbol display area as a result of the game may be displayed in different stop modes depending on the types of replay combinations selected. . Such a stop mode of the replay combination will be described with some examples.

(1) BAR_1
FIG. 69 is a diagram (No. 1) for describing a condition device that is allowed to operate when BAR_1 is selected. FIG. 69 shows a list of condition devices that operate when BAR_1 (a combination number 19) that is a replay combination is won. As shown in FIG. 69, when BAR_1 is selected as a winning combination, Lip 1, Lip 2 (Lip 2_1 to Lip 2_4), Lip 9 (Lip 9_1, Lip 9_2), Lip 23 (Lip 23_1 to Lip 23_3) ), Lip 24 (Lip 24_1, Lip 24_2), Lip 25, Lip 26 (Lip 26_1, Lip 26_2) operate simultaneously. The condition device shown in FIG. 69, FIG. 70 described later, and the like correspond to the condition devices exemplified in FIGS.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining a condition device that is allowed to operate when BAR_1 is won. FIG. 70 shows a list of display priorities regarding the display of symbols for the condition device (see FIG. 69) that operates when BAR_1 is won.

  The columns such as “left-middle-right” and “left-right-middle” shown in FIG. 70 indicate the stop order of the reels 301, that is, the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211, and operate when BAR_1 is won. It can be seen that the plurality of condition devices are given priorities (priority orders) for the condition devices that display symbols based on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211.

  In addition, the level of “display priority” shown in FIG. 70 indicates the level of the condition device that is preferentially displayed, and the execution timing (push timing) of the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is set for all reels. Is appropriate (corresponding to “when pressed”), and when any of the reels is pressed in the middle of stopping each reel (“when 3rd miss”, “when 2nd miss”, Equivalent to “at the time of 1st mistake”). Note that in the case of symbol combinations using symbols that are always arranged to be retracted (for example, replay symbols and bell symbols), there is no improper push timing as described above. In some cases, detailed classification of display priority is not performed.

  In FIG. 69, condition devices (specifically, Lip 9_1 and Lip 24_2) marked with “x” on the right side of the column operate when BAR_1 is won, but as condition devices for displaying symbols. It is not shown in FIG. 70 because it means that the condition device is not selected.

  Based on FIG. 69 and FIG. 70 described above, when BAR_1 is elected, the condition device having the highest priority is determined depending on in what order and at what timing the reel stop button 211 is pressed. The corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  Below, an example is given and it demonstrates in a time series about a mode that a symbol stops at the time of winning of BAR_1. FIGS. 71 to 73 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining an example of a symbol stop mode when BAR_1 is won.

  First, FIG. 71 shows an example of symbol stoppage when the reel 301 is stopped in the order of left, middle, and right (pressed in the left order) when BAR_1 is won. According to FIG. 70, when a reel stop operation is performed by pressing leftward at the time of winning BAR_1, the condition device of “Lip 1” is preferentially operated.

  Looking at the stop mode of the symbols at this time for each stop timing of each reel 301, first, the replay symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the left column by performing a stop operation on the reel stop button 211a (FIG. 71 ( A)) Next, when the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, the replay symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle row (FIG. 71B), and finally the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c. As a result, the replay symbol stops at the middle stage of the right column (FIG. 71 (C)).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), as a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “Lip 1”, the replay symbol alignment is displayed on the middle line, and a game privilege for replay is given. Although not shown in the figure, when the reel 301 is stopped by pressing the left pin when BAR_1 is selected, the condition device of “Lip 1” operates preferentially (see FIG. 70). Similarly, a replay symbol set is displayed on the middle stage line, and a game privilege for replay is given.

  Next, FIG. 72 shows an example of symbol stop when the reel 301 is stopped in the order of middle, left, and right (middle order pressing) when BAR_1 is won. According to FIG. 70, when the reel stop operation is performed by pressing in the middle order at the time of winning BAR_1, it means "Lip 24_1", "Lip 23_1", or "Lip 23 (Lip 23_1 to Lip 23_3"). The same applies to the following) ”and“ Lip 2 ”. Here, if the reel stop pressing timing is appropriate for all the reels (at the time of full pressing), “Lip 24_1” is preferentially operated.

  Looking at the stop mode of the symbols at this time for each stop timing of each reel 301, first, a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, so that the watermelon symbol stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 72 ( A)) Next, when the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a, the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 72B), and finally the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c. As a result, the plastic symbol a stops at the middle stage of the right column (FIG. 72 (C)).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 72C, as the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “Lip 24_1”, the symbol combination “BAR-watermelon-pla” is displayed on the middle line. It is difficult to recognize such a symbol combination as a replay combination at a glance, and further, a symbol combination that can easily recognize a replay combination is not displayed in the entire symbol display area (upper, middle, and lower three stages). However, a game privilege for re-game is given.

  Next, FIG. 73 shows an example of symbol stop when the reel 301 is stopped in the order of middle, right, and left (middle reverse pressing) when BAR_1 is won. According to FIG. 70, when the reel stop operation is performed by pressing the middle reverse during the BAR_1 win, “Lip 26_1”, “Lip 25”, “Lip 26_2”, and “Lip 2” are activated. Here, if the reel stop pressing timing is appropriate for all the reels (at the time of full pressing), “Lip 26_1” is preferentially operated.

  Looking at the stop mode of the symbols at this time for each stop timing of each reel 301, first, the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, so that the watermelon symbol stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 73 ( A)) Next, when the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the right column (FIG. 73B), and finally the stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a. As a result, the bell symbol stops at the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 73C).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 73C, as the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “Lip 26_1”, the symbol combination “Bell-Watermelon-BAR” is displayed on the middle line. Such a symbol combination is difficult to recognize as a replay role at a glance, as in the case of the middle order press, but is given a game privilege of replay.

  As described above, when BAR_1 is selected as a winning combination, it can be seen that various symbol combinations are displayed in the symbol display area depending on the pressing order and pressing timing of the reel stop button 211.

  However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “left order push” or “left pinch push” is recommended except when the push order is taught, so as long as a game according to the recommended fixed order is performed, When BAR_1 is won, the symbol stop mode as shown in FIGS. 72 and 73 is not seen. In the present embodiment, when BAR_1 to BAR_7, red BB, and blue BB (combination numbers 17 to 25) among the replay combinations are won, the reels 301 are pressed in the order of the first pressing to stop the left reel 301a first. When the stop operation is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is displayed on the active line (middle stage line 623a).

  Also, in the case of other winning combinations exemplified below, as in the case of BAR_1, a plurality of condition devices are prioritized based on the winning combination to operate, so that the stop operation push order and push timing Depending on the situation, there is a possibility that the symbol combination is displayed in a different stop mode. However, in the explanation of such other winning combination, a detailed explanation which is repeated will be omitted.

(2) Out of frame 1_A
Next, as a replay combination different from BAR_1, a description will be given of a pattern stop mode in the case of winning 1_A outside the frame of the combination number 1.

  74 and 75 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a condition device that is allowed to operate when winning 1_A outside the frame. 74 and 75 are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 69 and 70 described in the BAR_1 winning respectively.

  According to FIG. 74, when the out-of-frame 1_A is selected as a winning combination, Lip 2 (Lip 2_1 to Lip 2_4), Lip 4 (Lip 4_1 to Lip 4_4), Lip 5 (Lip 5_1, Lip 5_2), Lip A plurality of condition devices 12 (Lip 12_1 to Lip 12_10), Lip 19 (Lip 19_1 to Lip 19_4), Lip 20 (Lip 20_1 to Lip 20_4) operate simultaneously. Of these, Lip 12_6 to Lip 12_10 are not selected as condition devices for displaying symbols, and thus are not shown in FIG. 75 in which display priorities are summarized.

  According to FIG. 74, the condition device that is allowed to operate when winning out of frame 1_A is partially different from the condition device (FIG. 69) at the time of winning BAR_1, and the priority of the condition device shown in FIG. Settings different from those in the case of winning BAR_1 (FIG. 70) are made. Therefore, it can be seen that, when winning outside the frame 1_A, the symbols can be stopped in a manner different from BAR_1 by operating the condition device shown in FIGS. 74 and 75.

  FIGS. 76 to 78 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining an example of a symbol stop mode at the time of winning 1_A outside the frame.

  First, FIG. 76 shows an example of symbol stop when the reel 301 is stopped by pressing leftward when winning out of frame 1_A. According to FIG. 75, when a reel stop operation is performed by pressing leftward when winning out of frame 1_A, the condition devices “Lip 4” and “Lip 5” are preferentially activated. Whether the symbol combination corresponding to “Lip 4” or “Lip 5” is pulled into the effective line when the reel 301 is actually stopped is determined by the pressing timing of each reel, and more specifically, Based on the position of the reel when the reel stop button 211 is pressed, a conditional device having a drawable symbol is determined, and the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional device is stopped.

  When the stop mode of the symbols is viewed at each stop timing of each reel 301, first, the replay symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the left column by performing a stop operation on the reel stop button 211a (FIG. 76 (A)). . This replay symbol is common to “Lip 4” and “Lip 5”.

  Next, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, the symbol that stops in the middle row of the middle row is a bell symbol for "Lip 4", or a BAR symbol or a cherry symbol for "Lip 5". . Here, for example, if the BAR symbol of SEQ ID NO: 9 is within a pullable range, the BAR symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle row (FIG. 76 (B)). At this stage, the only condition device that is allowed to display symbols is “Lip 5_1”.

  Finally, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the watermelon symbol constituting the symbol combination of “Lip 5_1” stops in the middle row of the right column (FIG. 76C). As can be seen from FIG. 46, the watermelon symbol can be pulled in at any pressing timing (there is within 4 frames at any position during operation), so the symbol corresponding to “Lip 5_1”. The combination is always established on the active line, and a game privilege for replay is given.

  Here, out of the frame 1_A is a replay role, but in FIG. 76C, when the entire symbol display area is viewed, bell symbols are aligned on the upper line. This is because, referring to the sequence table of FIG. 46, there is a bell symbol on the replay symbol in the left column, the BAR symbol in the middle column, and the watermelon symbol in the right column, and “Lip 5_1”. When the condition device is activated, the bell symbols are always aligned with the upper line. The same applies when the condition device of “Lip 5_2” is activated. As described above, the stop mode in which the game bonus for re-playing is given and the symbol alignment such as the bell small role is displayed is referred to as bell replay in the present embodiment. In general, a bell symbol display is often a small winning combination, but the bell replay is a replaying role.

  As described above, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 4” can be stopped when winning outside the frame 1_A, but in this case, the symbol alignment indicating replay stops at the middle line. , Bell symbols are displayed together on the lower right line (not shown). Also, according to FIG. 75, the condition device that operates preferentially is the same as in the case of the left-hand pressing when the left pinch pressing is performed at the time of winning outside the frame 1_A. From the above, when the reel 301 is stopped by a forward press when winning outside the frame 1_A, the symbol combination is displayed in a symbol replay manner in the symbol display area.

  On the other hand, FIG. 77 shows an example of symbol stoppage when the reel 301 is stopped by middle reverse pressing when winning 1_A outside the frame. Details of the stop transition are omitted, but as shown in FIGS. 77 (A) to (C), each reel stops, and when all the reels 301 are stopped, the symbol corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 20”. As a combination, the replay symbol stops in the middle row of the left column, any of the red 7 symbol, blue 7 symbol, plum a symbol, or plum b symbol stops in the middle row of the middle row, and the watermelon in the middle row of the right row Stops. Based on the display of such a symbol combination, a game privilege of re-game is given. However, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), when the middle reverse pressing stop operation is performed, the bell symbol alignment does not appear in the symbol display area, and the bell replay is not stopped.

  FIG. 78 shows an example of symbol stop when the reel 301 is stopped by reverse pinching when winning outside the frame 1_A. 78 (A) to (C) show that the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 12 — 3” is stopped on the effective line as a stop mode when pushing, and a game privilege for replay is given. However, in this case as well, the stop mode of bell replay is not the same as the stop mode shown in FIG.

  Thus, it can be seen that when the outside frame 1_A is selected as a winning combination, various symbol combinations are displayed in the symbol display area depending on the pressing order and pressing timing of the reel stop button 211. In particular, when the pressing order of the reel stop button is the recommended procedure, ie, the forward pressing (left-hand pressing or left-hand pressing), the symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display area in the symbol display area. In some cases, it does not become a form of bell replay.

  And in this embodiment, as shown collectively in FIG. 64, when winning out-of-frame 1_A, B to out-of-frame 8_A, B (combination numbers 1-16) among the replay roles, the above-described bell replay mode is used. The stop event of appears.

(3) Weak Cherry Next, a description will be given of how the symbols are stopped when the weak cherry of the role number 26 is won.

  FIGS. 79 and 80 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a condition device that is allowed to operate when a weak cherry is won. FIGS. 79 and 80 are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 69 and 70 when BAR_1 is won and FIGS. 74 and 75 when 1_A outside the frame is won, respectively.

  According to FIGS. 79 and 80, when a weak cherry is selected as a winning combination, a plurality of condition devices of Lip 3 (Lip 3_1 to Lip 3_12) are simultaneously activated regardless of all pushing orders and pushing timings. To do. The display priority is not particularly provided, and a condition device having a drawable symbol out of Lip 3_1 to Lip 3_12 is selected.

  81 and 82 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining an example of a symbol stop mode when the weak cherry is won.

  First, FIG. 81 shows a stop example of symbols when the reel 301 is stopped by pressing leftward when a weak cherry is won. The stop transition shown in FIGS. 81 (A) to 81 (C) is a state when the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 3_1” is finally stopped based on the push timing.

  First, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a, the red 7 symbol (array number 2) stops at the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 81 (A)). In the lower part of the red 7, the cherry symbol is stopped due to the arrangement configuration. Next, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, a bell symbol (for example, array number 5) stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 81 (B)). In the lower part of the bell symbol, the cherry symbol stops due to the arrangement. Finally, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the cherry symbol (array number 20) stops in the middle row of the right column (FIG. 81 (C)). As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Rip 3_1”, “Red 7-Bell-Cherry” is displayed on the middle stage line, and a game privilege for re-game is given.

  Here, referring to FIG. 81 (C), in the entire symbol display area, it can be seen that the cherry symbols are arranged in lines other than the lower right line, that is, the left column and the middle column. The aspect is referred to as cherry replay in this embodiment. In general, cherry symbols are symbols in which a certain number of benefits are likely to be suggested when a predetermined number of symbols stop in the symbol display area. Therefore, the cherry replay stop mode is shown, so that the player can be aware of the presence of the cherry symbol while playing the replay role.

  On the other hand, FIG. 82 shows another example of symbol stop when the reel 301 is stopped by pressing leftward when a weak cherry is won. The stop transition shown in FIGS. 82 (A) to 82 (C) is an example in the case where the stop operation is performed at a push timing different from the push timing of FIG. 81, and finally the condition device of “Lip 3_5” It is a state when the symbol combination corresponding to is stopped.

  At this time, first, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a, the blue 7 symbol (array number 12) stops in the middle row of the left column (FIG. 82 (A)). In the lower part of Blue 7, the cherry symbol does not stop due to the arrangement configuration. Next, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, the bell symbol (for example, array number 5) stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 82 (B)). In the lower part of the bell symbol, the cherry symbol stops due to the arrangement. Finally, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the cherry symbol (array number 20) stops in the middle row of the right column (FIG. 82 (C)). As a result, a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 3_5”, “Blue 7-Bell-Cherry”, is displayed on the middle stage line, so that a game privilege for re-playing is given.

  Here, comparing FIG. 82 (C) with FIG. 81 (C), regarding the stop appearance of the entire symbol display area, in the case of FIG. For this reason, the cherry does not stop within the frame, and the cherry replay stop mode cannot be revealed as a whole. From this, it can be seen that, when the weak cherry is won, the cherry replay is not stopped depending on the pressing timing of the left reel.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, various types of replay winning combinations are prepared. Regardless of which replay winning combination is selected, the symbol combination indicating replay is stopped on the active line, but in the case of some replay winning combinations (for example, bell replay or cherry replay) A specific symbol combination is shown in the display area (not limited to a uniform pattern on the line, including that the specific symbol stops at a specific position).

  In addition to the bell replay and cherry replay exemplified above, the replay winning roles included in such “partial replay winning roles” include “watermelon play (role numbers 27 and 28)” and “chance replays (role No. 29, 30) ”and the like are prepared. When each replay combination is won, the symbol combination based on the selected replay combination is stopped and displayed in the basic display area. As an effect of preparing such a plurality of types of replay roles, for example, an expectation level regarding the provision of a privilege according to the type of the replay role selected (for example, the expected level of winning an AT game, the number of games in an AT game, etc. By setting so that the degree of expectation regarding the addition) is different, it is possible to differentiate by which replay role is won. In addition, since the stop mode of the symbol combination differs depending on the type of replay role selected, the player can easily recognize which replay role has been won. There is also.

[10-1-3. Bell role]
Next, the bell role as a winning combination will be described. This bell role is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. In this embodiment, several kinds of bell roles are prepared, and an example thereof will be specifically described below.

[10-1-3-1. Common bell]
First, a description will be given of the common bell in which the winning degree at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals paid out based on the winning) does not change depending on the pushing order of the reels 301.

  The “strong bell” of the role number 55 shown in FIG. 63 is a bell role of any push order that can be expected to pay out 10 medals regardless of the order or position of the reel 301 when winning. . When a strong bell is won, the bell 1 and bell 2 condition devices are activated, so that whatever order the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the strong bell symbol combination (CB bell) is on the active line. Are displayed) and 10 medals are paid out.

  83 and 84 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a condition device that is allowed to operate when a strong bell is won. 83 and 84 are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 69 and 70 when BAR_1 is won, and FIGS. 74 and 75 when the outside 1_A is won, respectively.

  According to FIGS. 83 and 84, when a strong bell (a role number 55) that is a bell role of any pushing order is selected as a winning combination, a plurality of bells 1 and 2 (bell 2_1 to bell 2_9) are selected. The condition device is activated simultaneously. If the push order is forward push or middle push, the conditional device of bell 1 is preferentially operated regardless of the push timing, and if the push order is reverse push, the bell 2 is assumed regardless of the push timing. Two condition devices are preferentially activated.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a symbol stop mode when a strong bell is won. FIG. 85 shows an example of symbol stoppage when the reel 301 is stopped by pressing in the left order when a strong bell is won. The stop transition shown in FIGS. 85 (A) to 85 (C) is a state when the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Bell 1” is finally stopped regardless of the pressing timing.

  First, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a, a bell symbol (for example, array number 4) stops at the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 85 (A)). Next, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, the bell symbol (for example, array number 5) stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 85 (B)). Finally, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the bell symbol (array number 4) stops at the middle stage of the right column (FIG. 85 (C)). As a result, the bell line pattern “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the middle line, and this is a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Bell 1”. Is granted.

  In the above description, the bell symbol that stops at the middle stage of each row is exemplified by the array number. However, in each reel of the reel 301, the bell symbols are arranged with no more than four different symbols interposed therebetween. For this reason (see FIG. 46), any bell symbol can be drawn on the effective line regardless of the pressing timing.

  In addition, although not shown in the figure, when a strong bell is won, if the stop operation is performed by pressing the left pin or the middle push (middle forward push or middle reverse push) as another push order, the conditional device of the bell 1 is given priority. Since it operates, the bell symbols are aligned with the middle stage line and stopped as in FIG. In addition, when a strong bell is won and a stop operation is performed by pressing right (reverse pinching or reverse order), the bell 2 condition device is activated preferentially, so the bells are placed in the middle of the left and middle rows. The symbols are arranged, and each symbol other than the bell symbol stops in the middle of the right column (CB bell symbol combination). In the symbol combination of the CB bell, the target symbol can be drawn onto the effective line regardless of the pressing timing. Also, in the case of the CB bell symbol combination, a gaming bonus of 10 medal payouts is given in the same way as when the bells are aligned.

  In this way, when the strong bell is won, the displayed symbol combinations are slightly different depending on the pressing order (the CB bell symbol combination only in the case of reverse pressing), but the number of medals to be paid out as a gaming privilege is the same. For example, since a normal push operation procedure is recommended in normal times, it can be said that the winning combination is unquestionable push order that can be stably expected to pay out 10 medals. It can also be called "bell".

[10-1-3-3. Push order bell]
Next, a description will be given of a push order bell in which the winning degree at the time of winning (the winning rate and the number of medals to be paid out based on the win) can be changed depending on the pushing order of the reel 301.

  The bell combination of the combination numbers 31 to 46 shown in FIG. 63 is a combination of symbols (stopped and displayed in the symbol display area (more strictly, the effective line) depending on the pressing order and pressing timing of the reel stop button 211 at the time of winning. As a result, the combination of small medals to be paid out as a prize is changed. Note that the “CB + Bell” role with the role numbers 47 to 54 is a duplicate role, but the actual stoppage is the same as the Bell role with the role numbers 39 to 46 by the control in which the small role is drawn with priority over the bonus role. Since it is controlled in the same way, the description is omitted.

  In general, a small combination whose stop appearance changes depending on the pressing order of the reel stop button 211 is called a push order small combination, and may be called by adding a selection number related to the pressing order. For example, the bell combination of the combination number 31 to 38 is a bell combination that can be expected to pay out the most medals when the first stop reel and the second stop reel are in the proper pushing order at the time of winning, “Left-Middle-Right”, “Left-Right-Middle”, “Middle-Left-Right”, “Middle-Right-Left”, “Right-Left-Middle”, “Right-Middle-Left” Since a proper push order is included in the push order of, it can be called a 6-option bell. In addition, the bell roles having the role numbers 39 to 46 are assumed to be the bell roles that can be expected to pay out the most medals when the first stop reel is in the proper pushing order at the time of winning, and the left reel 301a is the first to be played. Among the three types of “forward press” to stop the operation, “intermediate press” to stop the middle reel 301b first, and “reverse press” to stop the right reel 301c first, an appropriate one press order is included. From this, it can be called a 3 choice bell. In addition, “appropriate” and “inappropriate” regarding the push order small role mean “appropriate” and “inappropriate” in terms of the push order that can be expected to pay out the most medals. It is different from appropriate / inappropriate in (press forward).

  Hereinafter, as an example of such a bell combination (push order bell) of the push order small combination, a case where the bell _1 in the combination number 39 is selected as the winning combination will be described. The middle bell_1 is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out the most medals when the middle bell_2 to middle bell_4 (role numbers 40 to 42) are elected and the stop operation is performed by pressing the middle. When the stop operation is performed in the other pressing order, fewer medals are paid out than in the case of middle pressing, or no medal is paid out.

(1) Proper Pushing Order FIGS. 86 and 87 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a condition device that is allowed to operate when the middle bell_1 is selected. FIGS. 86 and 87 are drawings corresponding to FIGS. 69 and 70 when BAR_1 is won, and FIGS. 74 and 75 when the outside 1_A is won.

  According to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, when the middle bell_1 (the role number 39), which is the push order small combination with the middle push as an appropriate pushing order, is selected as the winning combination, the bell 3, AT1, AT6, AT19. , AT21 multiple condition devices operate simultaneously. When the stop operation is performed by the middle push that is the proper push order, the conditional device of the bell 3 is preferentially operated regardless of the push timing. In addition, when the stop operation is performed by an improper push order, the AT1 and AT6 condition devices operate preferentially. In the forward push column of FIG. 87, “zero 1” and “zero 2” are described, which will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, when the stop operation is performed by reverse pressing that is an inappropriate pressing order, the condition devices of AT 19 and AT 21 operate preferentially.

  FIGS. 88 to 90 are diagrams (No. 1 to No. 3) for explaining an example of a symbol stop mode at the time of winning the middle bell_1.

  First, FIG. 88 shows a stop example of symbols when the reel 301 is stopped by pressing the middle bell in the middle bell_1 win. At this time, when the “bell 3” condition device is preferentially operated and a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, a bell symbol (for example, array number 5) stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 5). 88 (A)). Next, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a, the watermelon symbol (for example, array number 5) stops at the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 85 (B)). Here, referring to FIG. 46, the bell symbol always stops at the lower stage of the watermelon symbol in the left reel 301a. Finally, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the watermelon symbol (for example, array number 3) stops at the middle stage of the right column (FIG. 88C). Again, referring to FIG. 46, the bell symbol always stops at the upper stage of the watermelon symbol in the right reel 301c.

  As a result, when a stop operation is performed by pressing in the middle order at the time of winning the middle bell_1, since the symbol combination corresponding to the “bell 3” condition device “watermelon bell-watermelon” is displayed on the middle stage line, A gaming privilege of paying out three medals is awarded. Furthermore, at this time, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the bell symbol alignment is displayed on the right-up line in the symbol display area, and the bell alignment is displayed on the right-up line for the player. Thus, it can be recognized that three medals have been paid out. When a stop operation is performed by pressing the middle reverse during the middle bell_1 winning, the conditional device of the bell 3 operates preferentially, and the symbol combination similar to FIG. 88 (C) is displayed, and three medals A payout gaming privilege is granted.

(2) Inappropriate pushing order On the other hand, FIG. 89 shows a stop example of symbols when the reel 301 is stopped by pushing in the left order when middle bell_1 is selected. At this time, the condition devices “AT1” and “AT6” operate preferentially. First, the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “AT1” is drawn will be described. When a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211a, a replay symbol (for example, array element number 3) stops in the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 89A). At this time, referring to FIG. 46, the bell symbol always stops at the upper stage of the replay symbol in the left reel 301a. Next, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211b, the red 7 symbol (array number 2) stops in the middle row of the middle row (FIG. 89 (B)). Here, referring to FIG. 46, in the middle reel 301b, there is no bell symbol in the upper and lower stages of the red 7 symbol, so the bell symbol does not stop in the middle row. Finally, when a stop operation is performed on the reel stop button 211c, the cherry symbol (array number 20) stops in the middle row of the right column (FIG. 89 (C)). Again, referring to FIG. 46, the bell symbol always stops at the lower part of the cherry symbol in the right reel 301c.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 89C, the symbol combination corresponding to the “AT1” condition device “Replay-Red 7-Cherry” is displayed on the middle line, so that one medal is paid out. The game privilege is granted.

  Here, in FIG. 89 (C), as shown in FIG. 85 (C), no uniform pattern of bell symbols is seen in the symbol display area, and no uniform manner of other symbols is seen. Such a stop appearance can be called a “breaking eye” because it seems that no role is provided from the player's viewpoint. In this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed in an inappropriate push order when winning a push order small combination, the bell symbols are aligned in the proper push order by stopping the “split eyes”. Compared with, the effect which shows that the degree of the game privilege obtained is low is implement | achieved. Actually, in the case of the loose eye in FIG. 89C, only one medal is paid out.

  In the case where the left bell button is pressed in the middle bell_1 win, the position of the middle reel 301b at the timing when the depressing operation to the reel stop button 211b is not possible to draw the red 7 symbol, the "AT1" The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device cannot be drawn. At this time, for example, if the position of the middle reel 301b is a position where the blue 7 symbol (sequence number 12) can be drawn, the blue 7 symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle row based on the condition device of “AT6”. When the right reel 301c is stopped, the symbol a symbol is stopped in the middle row of the right column, so that the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “AT6” is displayed and a game privilege for paying out one medal is given. . Also in this case, since there is no bell symbol in the upper and lower stages of the blue 7 symbol in the middle reel 301b, it is clear that the bell symbol alignment mode is not displayed in the symbol display area, and the disparity is displayed. .

(2-1) Zero point due to improper pressing order The example of symbol stop when left-order pressing was performed when winning the middle bell_1 was explained, but in addition to this, pressing operation on the reel stop button 211b is performed. Depending on the timing, the position of the middle reel 301b may be a position where neither the red 7 symbol nor the blue 7 symbol can be retracted. Specifically, assuming that the retractable range is 4 symbols (4 frames), the symbol of the middle reel 301b located in the middle stage when the stop operation is performed is the sequence number 3 to 7, or In the case of No. 13 to No. 17, neither the red 7 symbol nor the blue 7 symbol can be drawn into the middle row of the middle row.

  As described above, when the predetermined condition device is operating and the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device cannot be pulled in by the push timing, the main board 409 stops “zeroing”. For example, when the middle bell_1 is won, the symbol combinations corresponding to “zero 1” and “zero 2” shown in FIG. 87 can be stopped on the effective line.

  Here, as with the condition device described above, the zero point is one that is activated when a predetermined winning combination is won and is subject to pull-in control, but the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line. Even if it is made, the gaming privilege of paying out medals is not granted. In the reel stop control, when the stop operation to the reel stop button 211 is performed at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to the preferentially operating condition device cannot be pulled in during the zero-th operation, The symbol combination corresponding to the eye is drawn. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the zero mark stops on the effective line, the alignment mode by any symbol is not displayed on any straight line in the symbol display area. By making it “breaking eyes”, it is devised not to give the player the impression that some role has stopped. However, in the case of “Dissemble” indicated by the symbol combination corresponding to the conditional devices such as “AT1” to “AT21”, the medal is paid out while only one piece is issued, whereas in the case of “zero”, the medal is paid out. The difference is that there is no payout.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining an example of a zeroth symbol combination. In FIG. 91, “zero 1” to “zero 3” are given as examples of zeros that can appear in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, and symbol combinations corresponding to the zeros are shown. For example, in the case of “zero 1”, the symbol combination “Replay-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the effective line, and there is no alignment pattern by any symbol on any straight line in the symbol display area. Do not show.

  FIG. 90 shows an example in which the zero point (zeroing 1) stops when the reel 301 is stopped by pushing leftward in the middle bell_1 win. As described above, the condition devices “AT1” and “AT6” preferentially operate when the middle bell_1 is won. Of the symbol combinations corresponding to these condition devices, the replay symbol of the first reel 301a to be stopped first can always be drawn into the effective line, so the zeroth stop is not determined at the time of the first stop. The replay stops at the middle stage of the left column (FIG. 90 (A)). However, in the second stopped middle reel 301b, if neither the red 7 symbol of "AT1" nor the blue 7 symbol of "AT6" could be retracted, the zero stop (zero 1 or zero 2) is decided to stop. To do. Here, as a symbol that can be pulled in, for example, if there is a bell symbol of sequence number 5, the bell symbol stops at the middle stage of the middle row as a symbol corresponding to zero 1 (FIG. 90B). Finally, when the reel 301c is stopped, a bell symbol (for example, array No. 4) stops in the middle of the right column as a symbol corresponding to zero 1 (see “zero 1” in FIG. 91) (see FIG. 91). 90 (C)).

  As shown in FIG. 90C, the symbol combination “Replay-Bell-Bell” corresponding to “zero 1” is displayed on the active line, but the symbol stops in the symbol display area at this time. In the aspect, although the bell symbols are arranged in the left row and the middle row in the right downward direction, the bell symbols are stopped in the middle row in the right column, so that the bell symbols are not aligned. Further, no uniform pattern by other symbols is displayed. Such a pattern stop mode by zeroing can give the player an impression that the bells have not been aligned until the bells are aligned, and no medals are paid out as a bonus of the game result.

  In this way, the push order bell is the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning the prize when the stop operation is performed in the proper push order and when the stop operation is carried out in the wrong push order. Can make a difference. This difference can also be determined from the stopping appearance of the symbol display area (bell alignment and looseness). In addition, when a stop operation is performed at an inappropriate push timing, it is possible to control the winning combination of the winning combination that can receive a medal payout. In this case, the zero point is displayed. Is done.

(3) Use of push order bell Although the above-mentioned middle bell_1 was a three-choice bell, a proper push order and an improper push order are also applicable to a six-choice bell, such as the bell roles of the role numbers 31 to 38. It is possible to make a difference in the number of medals to be paid out according to the pressing order, and it is also possible to display a zero mark when winning a prize. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the 6-option bell is stopped in the proper pushing order, the “bell 1” condition device is preferentially activated instead of the “AT” condition device. I will do it. As explained for the strong bell winning, the symbol combination corresponding to the “bell 1” condition device (middle bell set) can always be drawn on the effective line, so the 6-option bell stops in the proper pushing order. When operated, 10 medal payouts are performed instead of 3 medal payouts in the case of the 3 choice bell. For the 6-option bell, if the stop operation is performed in an inappropriate push order, the condition devices “AT1” to “AT21” that display “Discolored” operate as in the case of the 3-option bell. Thus, when zeroing is performed at the push timing, the zeroing may be displayed.

  According to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in an appropriate pushing order when the three-option bell is won, three medals are paid out as a specified number of three game results. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed in the proper pushing order when the 6-option bell is won, 10 medals will be paid out as the specified number of 3 games. You can increase the handheld medal.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 64, the proper pushing order of the pushing order bells in this embodiment is limited to the first stop reel other than the left reel 301a. However, as described above, in this embodiment, the recommended procedure is to press the left reel 301a for the first stop in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, even if the pressing order bell is won, As long as the player is playing in the recommended procedure, the stop operation is not performed in the proper pushing order, and 3 or 10 medal payouts are not given. In other words, in the normal gaming state, even if the pushing order bell is won, the condition devices “AT1” to “AT21” operate preferentially. Either one payout based on “No” or no payout based on the display of “zero” is given.

  However, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has an AT function, and an appropriate push order is taught during an AT game, and a player performs a lot of medal payouts by performing a stop operation according to the teaching. (10 or 3) can be easily received. That is, in the present embodiment, the above-described push order bell can be said to be a winning combination provided for an AT game. In the normal gaming state at the time of non-AT, if a player has illegally obtained a medal by performing a stop operation different from the recommended procedure, the AT lottery may be temporarily stopped , Appropriately adjust the expected value of the overall medal payout.

[10-1-4. Cherry role]
Explain the role of cherry as a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the cherry hand for which medals are paid out by winning at the time of winning is a strong cherry with a hand number 56 and a middle cherry with a hand number 57. Although not shown, the symbol stop mode when each cherry role is won will be briefly described.

  When a strong cherry is won, the “cherry 1” and “single hand 1” condition devices are activated, and if the stop operation is performed at the most ideal stop timing, the cherry symbol is displayed on the lower line of the symbol display area. The symbols in each row are stopped so that three medals are paid out. In addition, when the stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a push timing at which the cherry symbol can be drawn into at least the lower row of the left row, a predetermined symbol combination that displays at least the cherry symbol at the lower row of the left row is used. Display 3 medals. The two stopping modes described above are based on the “cherry 1” condition device. In addition, when the left reel 301a is stopped at a pressing timing at which the cherry symbol cannot be pulled into the lower row of the left column, a symbol combination based on the condition device of “one-piece combination 1” is displayed. The medal is paid out.

  When the middle cherries are won, the “cherry 2” and “single hand 2” condition devices are activated, and if the stop operation is performed at the most ideal stop timing, the middle line (ie, the effective line) of the symbol display area The symbols in each row are stopped so that the cherry symbols are lined up, and three medals are paid out. In addition, when a stop operation of the left reel 301a is performed at a push timing at which the cherry symbol can be pulled into at least the middle row of the left row, a predetermined symbol combination that displays at least the cherry symbol in the middle row of the left row is used. Display 3 medals. The above two stopping modes are based on the “cherry 2” condition device. In addition, when the left reel 301a is stopped at a pressing timing at which the cherry symbol cannot be pulled into the middle row of the left column, a symbol combination based on the condition device of “one piece of two” is displayed. The medal is paid out.

  In this way, when a winning combination of cherry as a winning combination is made, if a stop operation that can display the cherry symbol of the left reel 301a in the symbol display area is performed, three medals are paid out as a winning of the cherry role. When the stop operation is performed at a position where the cherry pattern of the left reel 301a cannot be drawn, a single winning combination is awarded in a disjointed manner. In this embodiment, the winning combination that may be won by a single winning combination is limited to the above-mentioned cherry winning combination or the weak chance winning combination described later, so even if the cherry symbol cannot be stopped when the cherry winning combination is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that either the cherry role or the weak chance role has been won.

[10-1-5. Chance role]
Explain the chance role as a winning combination. As shown in FIG. 64 and the like, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, as the winning combination named chance, “strong chance_1 (role number 29), strong chance_2 (role number 30)” and “weak chance ( However, since the former is a kind of replay combination, a weak chance combination will be briefly described here.

  When a weak chance is won, a condition device of “one-piece combination 2 (one-piece combination 2_1 to one-piece combination 2_8)” is activated, and a stop operation is performed at a pressing timing capable of stopping a symbol combination corresponding to any of the condition devices. If it is, one winning combination wins and one medal is paid out. In addition, when a stop operation is performed at a pressing timing at which a symbol combination corresponding to a single combination cannot be drawn, the symbol combination “Zero 3” illustrated in FIG. 91 is displayed on the effective line as a zero. The medal is not paid out as a game privilege.

  The weak chance role is, for example, a win that increases the expectation level of the game privilege (in this case, the AT win) by setting the AT win in the AT lottery to be higher than usual. Used as a role. Note that the game privilege for increasing the degree of expectation is not limited to AT winning, but may be an extra winning rate in the AT game, a degree of the number of extra games, or the like.

  In addition, among the winning roles described so far (for example, strong chances, strong cherries, middle cherries, etc.), other roles that have a relatively low winning rate in the internal lottery are also played in the same way as weak chance roles. By using it as a winning combination that increases the degree of expectation for the privilege, it is possible to increase the player's expectation based on the game result. The winning rate in the internal lottery can be calculated from FIG. In such a case, the degree of expectation is preferably different depending on the winning combination.

[10-1-6. Bonus exclusive role]
The bonus exclusive role as a winning combination will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, the bonus exclusive combination with the combination number 59 is a combination selected only in the internal lottery during the bonus game, and the winning rate is 100% (provided that 100% is always required) Not.)

  During a bonus game, for example, a game is played with a prescribed number of two, and when a predetermined symbol combination corresponding to a bonus game exclusive combination (a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “dedicated bell 1”) is prepared, it is specified as a gaming privilege. The number of medals is paid out (for example, two). Further, during the bonus game, by making it easy to align the bonus game exclusive roles, it is possible to concentrate and execute a game that is easy to obtain medals. Therefore, each symbol constituting the combination of bonus game exclusive role symbols can be aligned on the active line without pressing, and in the present embodiment, the middle bell is aligned.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the bonus game, only the bonus game exclusive combination is subject to lottery, but a winning combination different from these may be provided. Furthermore, a bonus combination such as a bell or a cherry may be used instead of a bonus game limited combination such as a bonus game exclusive combination. Further, in this case, the number of medals paid out may be changed between the general state and the bonus game.

[10-1-7. Lost]
If the symbol combination displayed on the effective line does not correspond to any of the symbol combinations shown in FIGS. Then, in the game that is lost, no medal is given, and no change is made to the game after the next time. Therefore, it can be said that the loser is a role that does not give any game privilege to the player in the game and subsequent games.

  If lost, the result of the internal lottery using the lottery table shown in FIG. 63 is that a winning combination is selected, but the push timing is not appropriate and “zero” is displayed, or This is a case where no winning role was selected. The former is as described above for the zero point.

  The latter case, that is, a case where no winning combination is selected will be described. Referring to FIG. 63, it can be seen that such a loss occurs with a probability of 1/65536 in the bonus internal state. At this time, although the game privilege based on the game result of “losing” is not given, the bonus combination (CB) can be won because the bonus combination is established. Here, when the player is encouraged to win a bonus combination, the player may be notified of the procedure for stopping a specific symbol combination that satisfies the bonus game start condition by a notice effect or the like. Conversely, if it is recommended not to win the bonus combination, notify the player to that effect by a notification effect, etc., or notify the operation procedure that cannot stop a specific symbol combination of the bonus combination. What is necessary is just to notify a player. Furthermore, in such a special situation, the player is informed that the situation is special by providing a period during which the stop operation by the player cannot be accepted at the start or during the rotation of the reel (so-called freeze effect). You may make it emphasize.

  The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination.

  These symbols are not limited to the symbols and symbol combinations described above. In addition to the above symbols, a plurality of types of symbols can be newly provided. In addition, the number of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

  For example, a duplicate winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or replay combination) may be set. Which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed on the active line when such a winning combination is won is controlled by a reel stop process.

  In addition, the push order small combination has been described as the winning combination for AT. However, instead of the push order small combination, a small combination (push position small combination) that makes a difference in the number of medals that can be obtained by the player depending on the push position (push timing). ) May be used to teach an appropriate pressing position during an AT game.

  For example, when such a “push position small role” is provided, in the AT state (the game state in which an AT game is played), the reel stop operation at the proper push position is performed to the player by teaching or notifying the push position. The medal can be acquired at the proper push position, and the medal acquisition at the proper push position is made uncertain by not performing such teaching or notification in the non-AT state. It is possible to make a difference in the expected number of acquired medals and the consumption pace of medals for each gaming state.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 92 shows one basic game process procedure in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices described above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, restore the state before the power was turned off. Execute.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the number of bets for one game is determined and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. When the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a three-seat dedicated machine that can execute a game by inserting three medals, the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided. .

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the next step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the active line. It is allowed to stop.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, the display content (design combination) displayed on the effective line when it is determined in step S5 that all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are in a stopped state with the middle stage line 623a as the effective line. Then, a determination process for determining the winning combination by collating the permissible internal lottery result determined in step S3 is performed.

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S6 is executed. In addition, the winning combination determined in step S6 is CB or special replay (which is not used in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, but means special replay that triggers changing the gaming state such as the RT state), etc. In the case where the winning combination is accompanied by a change in the gaming state as described above, a grant is executed for various gaming benefits such as a change in the gaming state (a change in the gaming state shown in FIG. 63) and a re-game.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are internal processes triggered by a series of external operations performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[11-1. Start processing]
FIG. 93 specifically shows each process performed in the start-up process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is made by inserting medals corresponding to a MAX bet (that is, three or more medals are inserted in the case of a specified number of three games, and two or more medals are inserted in the case of a two specified number of games). It is assumed that it is satisfied only when there is an operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 that becomes a MAX bet.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the prescribed number is three, the middle stage line 623a becomes an active line, and an effective line lamp indicating this is turned on.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, and a random number is extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Note that the timing for extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds), for example, in the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

  In step S107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1). Note that the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIG. 63).

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag (game state flag) that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. Assume that the game state flags are prepared according to the game state, for example, a general state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When both the bonus internal flag and the bonus flag are in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated. Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (actuated / established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to each condition device are, for example, as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices is established, the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the effective line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 92 described above).

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (reel stop processing, Determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 14 = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. If this random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased, so that it is difficult to cause an event that specific random values are extracted in a biased manner.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value corresponding to CB is “1” among the random values in the extraction range (0 to 65535 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment), the extracted random value is “1”. The result of the internal lottery is “CB won”, and the condition device based on the winning of the CB role is processed as an information command in the game. In addition, when this is used, the winning probability of CB (probability that CB is selected as a result of the internal lottery, lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to CB. In the example of FIG. 63, the winning probability of CB in the general state is [total number of random values corresponding to CB / total number of random values in extraction range] is 18351/65536, and the winning probability of CB is about 1 / 3.6.

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (CB), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to RB2. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined role is set to consecutive random values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, The range of values is a random value “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning a predetermined role”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, a single role (for example, CB, strong bell, strong cherry, etc.) for winning only one winning role can be prepared. A simultaneous winning combination (for example, “CB + Bell”, etc.) for winning simultaneously may be prepared. The winning value of such a simultaneous winning combination (including a “duplicate combination” in which a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously selected) is also included in the above winning value.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  By the way, a single combination corresponds to one winning combination corresponding to one extracted random value, and a simultaneous winning combination refers to a plurality (in this case, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. The role corresponds. In other words, if the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. At this time, condition devices corresponding to each of the winning combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are established at the same time, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, in fact, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device are all It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if a replay combination and a bonus combination are won at the same time, and if the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop process in step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order or pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the effective line and is always replayed. The symbol combination is stopped.

  Also, according to FIG. 63, during the CB bonus game, it is set so that the bonus exclusive combination is always won (no losing), and therefore a medal is always executed during the period when the CB bonus game is executed. Will be paid out. In addition, when a BB game or the like is installed, the winning game can be set so that it always wins (no loss) in a bonus game or a large number of medals (for example, 15) can be expected to be paid out. If the winning value occupies most of the extraction range, a large amount of medals will be paid out within the execution period of the bonus game.

[11-3. Game state transition]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a gaming state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (CB game) is being played (step S151). If it is determined that a bonus game is being played (YES in step S151), whether or not the bonus game end condition has been satisfied. It is confirmed whether or not (step S152). If the bonus game end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the process returns while the gaming state during the bonus is maintained.

  If the bonus game end condition is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game is ended and the state is shifted to the general state (step S153). In the general state, when a game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals betted by the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (CB game) is not being played (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not the bonus is being played (bonus internal state) (step S154). That is, when a bonus combination (CB) is won in the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated. The condition device corresponding to this bonus combination is a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if is not displayed on the active line, it continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line after the next game.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is in the internal state, then it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S155). If it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (YES in step S155), the gaming state shifts to the bonus (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. The If a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the process returns while the gaming state inside the bonus is maintained.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is not in the internal state, it is determined whether or not a bonus combination (in this case, a CB or a duplicate combination including CB) is won (step S157). If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination is won (YES in step S157), the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). If the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line in the game selected as the bonus combination, the game in the bonus internal state is not performed, and the game state is controlled to the bonus state and the bonus game is executed. The If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in step S157), the game state is returned to the game state controlled to the general state.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the result information of the internal lottery is output from the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 as an information command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that has received the result information of the internal lottery output from the main board 409 includes means for executing an effect using, for example, the image display 500 or / and the speaker 512 based on the result information. .

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the AT function. As an example, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 performs AT lottery at a predetermined timing in each game. It is assumed that a game period (the number of AT games) for executing the AT game is determined. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AT-related control (AT lottery, lottery related to the AT game addition function, etc.) is not limited to the control by the effect control board 510. For example, the main board 409 ( In particular, it may be controlled by the CPU 1110).

  The AT winning determination in the AT lottery is performed based on, for example, the winning combination selected in the internal lottery. At this time, in general, a difference is provided in the degree of expectation for AT winning according to the type of winning combination and the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the symbol display area.

  Regarding the degree of expectation for AT winning according to the type of winning combination, for example, for the winning combination selected in the internal lottery, “strong bell”> “middle stage cherry”> “strong cherry”> “strong chance”> “weak chance” > Set a high degree of expectation for winning the AT in the order of “weak watermelon”> “push order bell”> “replay”. As for the degree of expectation for AT winning by the symbol combination, for example, “red 7 symbol alignment”> “blue 7 symbol alignment”> “BAR symbol alignment” “bell symbol” for the symbol combination stopped in the symbol display area. Set a high expectation for winning the AT in the order of “Middle line”> “Watermelon pattern”> “Replay pattern”. Note that a combination of the above examples may provide a difference in the degree of expectation for AT winning. Moreover, you may make it determine the expectation degree to AT winning based on another lottery criteria instead of based on the result of an internal lottery.

  Further, the number of AT games may be determined at the start of the AT game, and an opportunity for adding (adding) the number of AT games during the AT game may be provided. As an internal process when an opportunity to be added is provided, for example, determination regarding whether or not to add (addition determination) is performed, and thereafter determination regarding the number of games to be added (addition number determination) is performed. Note that the degree of expectation for the determination result of the determination of whether or not to add and the determination of the number of additions may be different based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery, in the same manner as the expected degree of winning in the AT lottery. The determination criteria may be provided.

  When the AT game is executed, an appropriate push order that can be expected to pay out the most medals is taught mainly in the case where the push order small combination is selected as a winning combination in the internal lottery. At this time, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510, based on the command including the internal lottery result information received from the main board 409, the proper pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c for the winning combination selected in the internal lottery. And the proper pushing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is taught (expressed) by an effect using the image display 500 or / and the speaker 512, for example.

  Specifically, when the bell combination with the combination numbers 31 to 46 (or 47 to 54) shown in FIG. 63 is selected as the winning combination, an appropriate pressing order is taught, and the reel is stopped according to the appropriate pressing order. When the stop operation of the buttons 211a to 211c is performed, the bell symbol alignment is stopped in the symbol display area. As a result, it is possible to suppress the stop of the above-mentioned “separate eyes” and “zero eyes” and to expect the most medals to be paid out. Such a teaching effect of proper pushing order is executed only during an AT game in principle, and the teaching effect is not executed during a game period other than an AT game (non-AT game). It can be said that the game is more advantageous for the player than the game.

  In addition, when an AT is won or during an AT game, the game is executed in a manner that allows the player to recognize (identify) the game situation. More specifically, it is possible to identify by winning an AT or being in an AT game (by the image display body 500 or the like) or by sound effects (by the speaker 512 or the like).

  The execution of the AT game is basically controlled by a system different from the gaming state controlled by the main board 409 (the gaming state shown in FIG. 94). In other words, the AT game can be executed in any of the game states of the general state and the bonus internal state. However, this is not the case when there is a conflict with rules and the like. For example, it is assumed that an AT game cannot be executed in a bonus state.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game state is controlled to any one of the general state, the bonus internal state, and the bonus state, and the game period of the AT game is controlled separately from these game states. The

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, four stages from setting values 1 to 4) (not shown). In each set value, a difference (step difference, extreme difference, etc.) is given to the internal lottery probability. The higher the setting value, such as setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3 <setting value 4, the higher the setting value, the more the lottery probability such as the internal lottery probability of the bonus winning combination and the AT winning rate is preferentially treated. It is good to make it. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be used as a clue when the player guesses the set value by giving a characteristic to each set value or according to the management of the hall or the like. Can be operated. The setting value is not limited to the above.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. FIG. 95 shows the content of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with a condition device that operates in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201 described above, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is, as described above, when focusing on the reel stop button 211 on which the pressing operation has been performed first. It is divided into three types of “forward press”, “middle press”, and “reverse press”. When viewed in the order of pressing operations on each reel stop button 211, “left order press”, “left pinch press”, “middle order” It can be divided into 6 types: “push”, “middle reverse push”, “reverse pinch push”, and “reverse forward push”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) at this time. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 524 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol in the upper or lower position can be a winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure differs from the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control is performed to draw the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 524 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when a reel stop operation by the player is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 524 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols) Minute) is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination symbol within the range, the reel is stopped by drawing it into the symbol display window 524. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 524 at the time when the reel stop operation is accepted, the corresponding winning symbol is within a range that can be drawn. If there is, the corresponding winning combination symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 524 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 524 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the condition devices corresponding to the replay combination (combination number 1 to 30), strong bell combination (combination number 55), bonus exclusive combination (combination number 59), etc. are operating. Thus, it is possible to make sure that the winning winning symbols are aligned without requiring the player's attention (see FIG. 46 described above). This is a combination of symbols corresponding to each of a replay role, a strong bell role (centered bell set or CB bell set), a bonus exclusive role (middle level set), for example, a middle bell set or CB in the case of a strong bell role This is because the corresponding winning symbol is arranged every four symbols at the maximum with respect to the symbols constituting the (bell alignment).

  For example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle when a predetermined replay role is won, focusing on the replay symbols, on the left reel 301a, up to four other symbols are arranged between the replay symbols and the replay symbols. (See FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay function is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn into one of the active lines and stopped be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a double combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. If a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the selected game, the established state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In a game in which a subsequent small combination (or replay combination) is not established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In this embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method should be adopted may be determined as appropriate when constructing the control program.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 has a winning combination symbol on any active line in the symbol display window 524 (a combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed). Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 96, the contents of this determination processing will be specifically described.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, the winning combination symbols are arranged on any active line from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 524 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). In particular, the stop eye when all the reels 301 are stopped is referred to as a stop eye.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, CB game flag). If the CB game flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the CB game flag is OFF (= 0), the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). The determination of the symbol combination will be described using a specific example. For example, when the CB (port number 60) shown in FIG. 63 is considered as a bonus, the symbol combination corresponding to CB is the symbol “blue 7-BAR-BAR”. When the symbols are arranged (see the condition device “CB” in FIG. 68) and such symbol arrangement is stopped on the middle line, it can be determined that the CB symbol (bonus symbol) has stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the active line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process relating to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process is terminated. To do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination). If it is determined that the symbol combination is a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S306), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small character symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small character winning). ) Is determined (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small role symbol, as a process in step S309, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). put out). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out. And after the process of step S309 is complete | finished, the applicable small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S310), and a process is complete | finished.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a small role symbol (NO in step S308), none of the above determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 is satisfied, and any symbol on the active line There are no winning symbols. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”. In such a case, a loss process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

  The above-described processing from step S302 to step S311 is processing executed when the gaming state is controlled to the general state or the bonus internal state. Next, the process after step S312 performed when determination of step S301 is not satisfy | filled is demonstrated. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (for example, a CB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

  In step S312, it is determined whether bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the active line. The “bonus game payout symbol” here refers to a collective term of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out when they are aligned during the bonus game. It is a symbol combination corresponding to a dedicated role. If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the bonus game payout symbols that have been prepared (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110 and the medal payout number is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout has been paid out.

  Subsequent to step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 98), and then the determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern that is NO in step S312, it is conceivable that a bonus game payout combination is won, but is eliminated, and a bonus game payout combination is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the bonus game payout establishment flag is turned off, and in the latter case, the lose flag is turned off. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the CB game, the bonus exclusive role is won with a winning rate of 100%, and when the bonus exclusive role is won, the winning combination can be won without being lost. The process of step S315 is not performed.

  The processes in steps S301 to S315 described above are determination processes performed by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110).

  On the other hand, since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the AT function as described above, it is necessary to perform a determination process (AT game determination process) related to the AT game for each game. In this embodiment, since the effect control board 510 (particularly the CPU 1118) controls the AT game, the AT game determination process is also performed by the effect control board 510. Since it is common to determine various items related to AT games (such as AT winning and the number of extras) based on the lottery result of internal lottery and stop symbols, the effect control board 510 is transmitted from the main board 409. The AT game determination process is performed based on the result of the internal lottery included in the command and information on the stop symbol. Also, as the timing at which the AT game determination process is performed, for example, the timing performed in parallel with the determination process by the main board 409 is conceivable. Therefore, in FIG. 96, for reference, steps S306, S310, S311, S314, S315 are performed. It is shown that the AT game determination process is performed after each of these processes (step S320). If “AT game is controlled by the main board 409”, the main board 409 may perform the AT game determination process at step S320 shown in FIG. Details of the AT game determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[11-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 of FIG. 96 is satisfied, a bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, CB flag) is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned on (= 1) and the bonus flag is turned off (= 0). Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count in the bonus game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. From the next game, the bonus game is started with the specified number of bets of the bonus game (in this example, the specified number of CB games is two).

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LEDs.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end determination process]
Next, the bonus game end determination process in step S314 in FIG. 96 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 96 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number has exceeded the total payout number defined for each bonus (40 in the case of CB). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the cumulative payout number in the bonus game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this). Here, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 63 to 68, etc., in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the condition device that always wins the bonus exclusive combination during the CB bonus and operates based on the winning of the bonus exclusive combination. The “dedicated bell 1” stops the corresponding symbol combination (middle row of bells) without losing it. As a result, two medals are paid out for each game in the CB bonus. Accordingly, in such a case, considering that the prescribed total payout number of CB bonus is 40, the CB game satisfies the end condition when 20 games continue.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S460), and the process ends.

[11-5-3. AT game determination process]
The AT game is a game that is executed based on winning the AT in the AT lottery, and the push order that can be expected to win many medals is taught (specified) at the time of winning the predetermined winning combination. The AT game determination process is a determination process related to the start, continuation, and end of such an AT game, and is performed by the AT control subject (for example, the effect control board 510). Hereinafter, an example of the AT game determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an outline of the AT game will be described. The AT game is started when the AT game start condition is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the AT end condition is satisfied. When the AT game start condition is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (AT game start flag) is turned ON (= 1), and another predetermined internal flag (AT game in-progress flag) is set during the AT game. ON (= 1). It is assumed that information such as these flags and the number of AT games to be described later is held in a memory in the board that controls the AT game (for example, the RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510).

  The condition for turning on the AT game start flag is, for example, that the AT is won in the AT lottery and the start condition of the winning AT is satisfied.

  The AT lottery is performed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied. As described in the description of the transition of the gaming state, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the winning of the AT is determined based on the result of the internal lottery (further including the symbol combination stopped and displayed in the symbol display area). Is done. Specifically, for example, when “strong bell” or “middle stage cherry” is selected as a winning combination in the internal lottery (role lottery), AT winning is determined with a high probability. Further, among the same type of winning combinations, a difference may be made in the AT winning rate. For example, when winning “red BB” or “blue BB” among the replaying combinations, the AT winning may be made.

  The winning AT start condition may be satisfied, for example, at the same time as the AT winning (the AT can be started from the next game), or the condition is satisfied when a predetermined game period (for example, 16 games) elapses ( The AT may be started after a so-called precursor period), and other various conditions may be set.

  In step S501 of FIG. 99, it is determined whether or not the AT game start flag is ON (= 1) as the first process of the AT game determination process. If the AT game start flag is ON (YES in step S501), the number of AT games at the start of AT is set (step S502), and the AT game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1) (step S503). The number of AT games at the start of AT may be set in advance as a fixed number of games, or may be determined by lottery when AT is won, or may be determined by other methods. Thereafter, the AT game start flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S504), and the process ends.

  By performing the processes in steps S502 to S504, the AT game is started from the next game. At the start of the AT game, an effect is given in which the start of the AT game and the number of AT games are clearly indicated to the player.

  On the other hand, if the AT game start flag is not ON in step S501 (NO in step S501), it is determined whether or not the AT game in-progress flag is ON (= 1) (step S505). If the AT game flag is ON (YES in step S505), it means that one game in the AT game has been performed, and therefore, processing for subtracting “1” from the value of the number of AT games is performed (step S505). S806).

  Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an extra function for adding the number of AT games based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game, apart from the number of games at the start time determined at the start of the AT game. Suppose you have When the number of AT games is added, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned ON (= 1), and the number of AT games to be added (number of added games) is determined. The condition for determining the extra is not particularly limited, and may be a winning of a specific winning combination in the winning lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method for determining the number of added games is not limited to a special method. Then, the following processes in steps S507 to S509 are performed when the function for adding the number of AT games is provided.

  First, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the extra flag is ON (= 1). If the extra flag is ON (YES in step S507), a process of adding the extra game number to the current AT game number is performed (step S508), and the extra flag is turned OFF (= 0). As a result, the number of remaining AT games is increased by an additional amount, and the duration of the AT game advantageous to the player is extended.

  After the process of step S509 (if the add-on function is not provided, after the process of step S506), it is determined whether or not the current number of AT games is “0” (step S510). Since the AT game end condition is satisfied, the AT game flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S511), and the process ends. At this time, not only the end of the AT game is clearly indicated to the player, but also information related to a series of AT games (for example, the total number of payout medals and the number of AT games continued in the AT game) is clearly indicated to the player. You can do it.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the current number of AT games is not “0” (NO in step S510), the AT game end condition is not satisfied, and the process is ended without changing the AT game in-progress flag. To do. As a result, the AT game continues in subsequent games.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various presentation operations are controlled by the presentation control board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) output from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (suggestion effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (an appearance that pays out appearance, and may be an aspect that informs the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as an effect of content that is difficult to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, in the case where the winning flag is a bonus combination or when an AT lottery is won in the AT lottery, the notice effect is clearly informed to the player of the game-related results such as “Bonus confirmed!” And “AT winning!” It is something that can be done. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination that is particularly pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or AT (because a large amount of medals can be obtained). That is, when a player wins an AT or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate the player.

  In addition, as a continuous production mode, there are those corresponding to game states such as a general state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state. These are clarifications about the game state, and the player can perform these effects (continuous effects) to determine whether the current game state is, for example, the general state or not. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is a state or not.

  The above is the basic game process in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

[12. Change of symbol display area]
In the following, the change of the symbol display area will be described in detail as an effect operation unique to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

  As described in [9] and the like, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the movable frame 522 of the reel display device 520 to move when a predetermined condition (hereinafter referred to as “frame variation condition”) is satisfied during the game. By moving, the symbol display area visible to the player can be changed from “basic display area” to “changed symbol display area”. The “movement” of the movable frame 522 here refers to “movement” in which the shape and area of the symbol display area (symbol display window 524) is changed before and after the movement of the movable frame 522 (in other words, "Deformation"). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, “movement” of the movable frame 522 includes the “deformation”.

  Note that the timing for changing the symbol display area by the movement of the movable frame 522 is not limited to a special timing, and an arbitrary timing can be set through the game. For example, the timing at which the reels 301a to 301c start rotating based on the start operation on the start lever 210, the reel 301 is rotating, or the timing at which a part or all of the reels 301 are stopped, For example, it may be the timing when the pressing operation to the reel stop button 211 is performed. Also, various conditions can be set for the “frame fluctuation condition” in which the movable frame 522 is moved, and data defining specific condition settings for the frame fluctuation condition is stored on the substrate that controls the reel display device 520. It is stored in advance in a mounted memory (for example, the ROM 1120 of the effect control board 510). Then, the movement of the movable frame 522 (change of the symbol display area) may be started immediately after the determination of the frame variation condition, or based on the timing for determining the frame variation condition and the determination result. A predetermined time difference may be provided between the change timing of the symbol display area.

  The symbol display area in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize various deformation modes by changing the mobility (movement amount, movement direction, arrangement location, etc.) of the movable frame 522, but in any case One of the characteristics is that, with the deformation, an out-of-frame area (out-of-frame symbol display area) of the basic display area is newly exposed to the player side. Hereinafter, changing the symbol display area will be described while paying attention to such an out-of-frame symbol display area.

[12-1. Degree of open area outside frame]
According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the out-of-frame symbol display area is exposed as the movable frame 522 is moved, so that the degree of identification by the player for some of the out-of-frame symbols can be changed. More specifically, when the symbol display area extends to the out-of-frame region, it is possible to change the way the player sees the out-of-frame symbol attached to the reel 301 located in the out-of-frame region. Such an operation can be called opening of the out-of-frame area. First, the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area in the present embodiment will be described first.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable frame 522 opens the out-of-frame area by moving a moving width that can change the degree of identification of a predetermined out-of-frame symbol. 100 to 103 are enlarged views (No. 1 to No. 4) in the vicinity of the reel display window of the slot machine. 100 to 103 exemplify how the outer frame area is opened downward in the basic display area as the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b) moves. Hereinafter, the description will be given with particular attention to the display mode of the left reel 301a. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining an identification mode of the lower frame symbol in FIGS. 101 to 103. The out-of-frame symbols 893 shown in FIGS. 104 (A), (C), and (E) are “red 7 symbols”, and the out-of-frame symbols 894 shown in FIGS. 104 (B), (D), and (F) are “blue”. 7 symbols ".

  FIG. 100 shows an example of a symbol stop mode before the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b) is moved, that is, when the symbol display area indicated by the symbol display window 524 is the basic display area. FIG. 101 to FIG. 103 each show an example of a symbol stop mode after the movement of the lower movable frame member 522b, and the degree of opening of the out-of-frame region is different.

  In FIG. 100, “watermelon symbol”, “bell symbol”, and “replay symbol” are shown in order from the top as three symbols in the left column stopped in the basic display area. However, according to FIG. 46, since there are several patterns of such symbols in the left column (reel 301a), which replay symbol “replay symbol” in FIG. 100 is attached to the reel 301a. It is difficult for the player to know. In other words, even if the “replay symbol” of FIG. 100 is any “replay symbol” of sequence number 3, 8, 13, or 18, the sequence of symbols is displayed in the stop mode shown in FIG. Is done.

  In FIG. 101, as an example of the case where the degree of opening of the out-of-frame region is the smallest, a part of the out-of-frame symbol is shown to be exposed so as to be visible. Specifically, for example, the movable frame 522 moves by a movement amount that exposes 1/3 or more of the vertical width of the out-of-frame symbol so that the player can recognize the presence of the out-of-frame symbol. . Note that the size of the symbol attached to the reel 301 may differ depending on the symbol. In such a case, it is assumed that 1/3 or more of the symbol is exposed with reference to the symbol having the smallest vertical width. What is necessary is just to make it the amount of movement. Such a degree of opening of the out-of-frame area is referred to as “opening degree 1”.

  When the degree of openness is 1, as shown in FIG. 101, the movement of the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b) allows the out-of-frame symbols to be seen on the lower side of the lower replay symbol, that is, the left row frame lower region. Become. However, even if the display mode of the out-of-frame symbol shown in FIG. 101 can be identified as either “red 7 symbol” or “blue 7 symbol”, it is difficult to make the distinction.

  Here, FIGS. 104A and 104B show an enlarged display example of the left column frame lower area when the out-of-frame area is opened with the degree of openness 1 as shown in FIG. . 104 (A) and 104 (B), the out-of-frame area is opened with the degree of openness 1, so that the out-of-frame symbol 893 attached to the area in the left column frame lower area 891 (in FIG. 104 (B)). 2/3 or less of the vertical width of the outer frame symbol 894) is hidden by the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b). When comparing FIGS. 104 (A) and 104 (B), it can be recognized by the player that any out-of-frame symbol exists, and the out-of-frame symbol is probably “7 symbols”. Since it can be inferred that the player is deaf, the out-of-frame symbols can be generally identified from the player. However, since there is no difference in the display mode of the out-of-frame symbols 893 and 894 shown in FIGS. 104 (A) and 104 (B), it is distinguished whether the symbol is “red 7 symbol” or “blue 7 symbol”. It ’s difficult.

  Next, in FIG. 102, as an example of the case where the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area is greater than in the case of FIG. For example, a specific movement amount is a movement amount that exposes a half or more of the vertical width of the frame outside the frame. Such a degree of opening of the out-of-frame area is referred to as “opening degree 2”.

  When the degree of openness is 2, as shown in FIG. 102, the movement of the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b) makes it possible to see the out-of-frame symbol on the lower side of the lower replay symbol, and the type of the out-of-frame symbol Can be identified up to “Red 7 symbol”.

  Here, FIGS. 104 (C) and 104 (D) show an enlarged display example of the left column frame lower area when the out-of-frame area is opened with the degree of openness 2 as shown in FIG. . 104 (C) and 104 (D), the out-of-frame area is opened with the degree of openness 2, so that the out-of-frame symbol 893 attached to the area in the lower left frame area 891 (in FIG. 104 (D)). A half or less of the vertical width of the outer frame symbol 894) is hidden by the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b). 104 (C) and 104 (D) can be identified by the player that any of the symbols outside the frame is “7 symbols”, and “red 7 symbols” and “blue 7 symbols”. Since the difference in the design aspect is exposed, the out-of-frame design 893 in FIG. 104 (C) is “red 7 design” and the out-of-frame design 894 in FIG. 104 (D) is “blue 7 design”. Can be identified. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 102, the out-of-frame symbols are exposed in the display area of FIG. 104 (C) in the area below the left column frame, so that the player can identify that the out-of-frame symbols are “red 7 symbols”. As a result, it can be recognized that the “replay symbol” of array number 3 is stopped in the lower line.

  Next, in FIG. 103, as an example of the case where the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area is greater than in the case of FIG. That is, the movable frame 522 corresponds to one normal frame (more specifically, the vertical width assigned per symbol when the reel 301 is viewed from the front, and the vertical portion includes a blank portion around the symbol. The entire amount of the latest one outside frame is made visible by moving the amount of movement (which may be considered) to the outside of the frame of the basic display area. Such a degree of opening of the out-of-frame region is referred to as “opening degree 3”. Note that when opening the area outside the frame with an opening degree of 3, it is not necessary to ensure the amount of movement completely for one frame including the blank part. For example, one symbol located in the area outside the frame can be completely visually recognized. It is sufficient if it is a grade to be done.

  When the degree of openness is 3, as shown in FIG. 103, the symbol display area after the movement of the movable frame 522 (lower movable frame member 522b) is further below the replay symbol displayed in the lower part of the basic display area. A new symbol (in this case, “red 7 symbol”) will be displayed. For example, when the symbols on the lower side of the frame are exposed one by one on all the reels 301a to 301c as shown in FIG. 103, one horizontal line (frame) is further below the lower line in the basic display area. Lower line) is created. In the example of FIG. 103, “red 7 symbol-blue 7 symbol-red 7 symbol” are displayed in order from the left column on the newly created lower frame line.

  104E and 104F show enlarged display examples of the left column frame lower area when the out-of-frame area is opened with the degree of openness 3 as shown in FIG. 104 (E) and 104 (F), the out-of-frame symbol 893 attached to the left row frame lower region 891 (the out-of-frame symbol 894 in FIG. All are not hidden. When comparing FIGS. 104 (E) and 104 (F), the out-of-frame symbol 893 in FIG. 104 (E) is “red 7 symbol” and the out-of-frame symbol 894 in FIG. 104 (F) is “blue 7 symbol”. Is easily identifiable. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 102, the out-of-frame symbols are exposed in the display area of FIG. 104 (E) in the left column frame lower area, so that the player can identify that the out-of-frame symbols are “red 7 symbols”. As a result, it can be recognized that the “replay symbol” of array number 3 is stopped in the lower line.

  The movement amount (opening degree 1 to 3) of the movable frame 522 shown in FIGS. 101 to 103 is merely an example, but such a movement amount is set in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. Thus, the out-of-frame area is opened with a predetermined open degree, and the degree of identification of the out-of-frame symbols is made variable.

  In this embodiment, even if the symbols are different types, such as “red 7 symbol” and “blue 7 symbol”, the symbols that are partly the same or similar are referred to as “similar symbols”. Call. Similar symbols can be identified from the player when the whole picture is clear, but it is difficult to identify from the player when all or most of the differences are hidden. . It can be said that not only “Red 7 symbol” and “Blue 7 symbol” but also “Plum symbol (Plum a to Plum c)” have a similar symbol relationship. In addition, although not the symbol shown in FIG. 46, for example, in the case of preparing a plurality of bell symbols by changing the number of stars drawn on the bell symbol for the bell symbol (see FIG. 47), etc. It can be said that the bell symbol has a similar symbol relationship.

  When similar symbols are used in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the degree of opening of the out-of-frame region, the reference to the out-of-frame design or the smallest vertical width as described above in the description of the opening degrees 1 to 3 Instead, the amount of movement according to each degree of opening may be set based on whether or not the difference between similar symbols is exposed (or identifiable).

  Specifically, for example, if there are symbol A and symbol B as similar symbols, when 20% or more of the vertical width of symbols A and B is exposed from either top or bottom, the difference between them can be identified. Suppose. At this time, when the open degree of the out-of-frame area is set to “open degree 1”, the out-of-frame area is set to be opened with a movement amount that is less than 20% of the vertical width of the symbols A and B from any one of the upper and lower directions. However, a movement amount that can identify the presence of the out-of-frame symbols is secured. When set in this way, the player's degree of identification with respect to the symbols outside the frame can be changed by changing the symbol display area. Further, when the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area is set to “opening degree 2”, it is set so that the out-of-frame area is opened with a movement amount of 20% or more of the vertical width. When set in this way, by changing the symbol display area, it is possible to change the player's degree of identification with respect to the symbols outside the frame, and to distinguish the symbols outside the frame from the similar symbols so that they can be clearly identified. In the case of “opening degree 3”, the movement amount may be greater than the vertical width of the symbols A and B.

  In addition, in a general spinning-type game machine, a cylindrical reel is used, and a transparent display panel or the like is disposed on the front surface of the reel. Some of the symbols outside the frame can be seen from the normal game, for example, by looking into the game. However, it is necessary to change the player's posture and line-of-sight direction in order to look into the out-of-frame design in such a general revolving game machine, except in situations where the out-of-frame design is intentionally looked into. Then, the existence value of the out-of-frame symbol was not important for the player.

  Compared to such a general spinning machine, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment does not allow the player to take an action of looking into the out-of-frame design. The identification degree is variable.

[12-2. Pattern display area change mode]
Next, how the symbol display area is changed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display area change mode accompanying the movement of the movable frame 522 is that the out-of-frame symbol display area is newly exposed to the player side and is positioned in the exposed out-of-frame symbol display area. It is a necessary condition that the degree of identification of out-of-frame symbols to be performed is different from that before the symbol display area is changed.

  In the following, in a game in which the frame variation condition is satisfied, the degree of release of the out-of-frame area is set to 3 and the symbol display area is changed after all reels 301 are stopped. An example of changing the area is shown. Note that the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area and the change timing of the symbol display area can be realized by combining the various patterns described above. For example, when the reel 301 is stopped for the first time, the out-of-frame area may be opened with an opening degree of 2 as the change timing of the symbol display area.

(1) First Modification Example of Symbol Display Area FIG. 105 is a diagram for describing a first modification example of the symbol display area. 105 (A) to 105 (D) are examples of stopping when the symbol display area is changed without changing the shape of the display area, and the frame area outside the frame released by the change extends over a plurality of reels. It is shown. Specifically, FIGS. 105A to 105D show a stop mode when a stop operation is performed by pressing in the left order when BAR_1 is selected.

  First, FIGS. 105 (A) to 105 (C) show the stop modes of the reels 301a to 301c based on the stop operation to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, which are the same as FIGS. 71 (A) to (C). Therefore, explanation is omitted. As shown in FIG. 105 (C), when all the reels 301 are stopped, the basic display area is a symbol display area, and in this area, the middle line corresponds to the condition device of “Lip 1”. A symbol combination of replay symbols that is a symbol combination is displayed.

  Then, after the stop state of FIG. 105 (C), the movable frame 522 is moved and the symbol display area outside the frame is released (FIG. 105 (D)). Specifically, by moving the movable frame 522 upward by one symbol from the normal frame position without changing its shape, the symbol display area becomes the shape (reel 3) of the previous symbol display area. The area on the upper side of the frame is displayed for one symbol (one line) on each reel while maintaining the book × three symbols). When moving as shown in FIG. 105, the movable frame 522 may be formed in a fixed frame shape because it is not necessary to change the shape of the symbol display area during movement.

  An area indicated by a gray background in FIG. 105D corresponds to a symbol display area outside the frame opened by the movement of the movable frame 522, and this is the same in other examples shown below. As shown in FIG. 105D, as a result of the symbol display area being changed, in the symbol display area after the change, a line (frame upper stage line) hidden one level higher than the upper line in the basic display area is displayed. The degree of identification of a symbol (outside frame symbol) that is exposed and located on the exposed line changes. Specifically, before the change of the symbol display area, the symbols outside the frame (all reels are watermelon symbols) that were stopped at the top of the frame, which could not be identified by the player, can be identified. On the upper line (the upper line of the frame of the basic display area), the watermelon symbol pattern combinations are displayed in an identifiable manner. It can be confirmed from the arrangement diagram of FIG. 46 that the watermelon symbol alignment is stopped on the upper frame line when the replay symbol alignment is stopped on the middle line of the basic display area.

  Moreover, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the correspondence of each display line displayed in a symbol display area changes by changing a symbol display area. For example, in the case of FIG. 105, the upper line and the middle line in the symbol display area (basic display area) before transformation are the middle line and the lower line in the symbol display area after transformation, respectively, and the upper frame line in the basic display area is This is the upper line in the symbol display area after deformation. Such a change in the correspondence relationship between the corresponding lines is the same in other examples shown below, and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  And the display line of the symbol combination displayed in a symbol display area changes by changing the correspondence of a display line in this way. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 105 (C) before the change of the symbol display area, the replay symbol alignment was only displayed on the middle line as a characteristic symbol combination. In FIG. 105 (D), the replay symbol alignment is moved and displayed on the lower line, and the watermelon symbol alignment is newly displayed on the upper line.

  In the example of FIG. 105 (D), since the shape of the symbol display area is maintained, the lower line of the basic display area is hidden. Thus, the basic display is changed in accordance with the change of the symbol display area. When making a part of the area invisible to the player (the same applies to other examples shown below), it is preferable that an effective line on which the game result is directly displayed is not included in the part.

(2) Second Modification Example of Symbol Display Area FIG. 106 is a diagram for describing a second modification example of the symbol display area. 106 (A) to 106 (D) show examples in which the symbol display area is changed without changing the shape of the display area, and the out-of-frame symbol area released by the change straddles a plurality of reels. It is shown. Specifically, FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (D) show a stop mode when a stop operation is performed by pressing in the left order when winning out of frame 1_A. 105 shows a stop example when the symbol display area is changed in the upper frame direction. FIG. 106 shows a stop example when the symbol display area is changed in the lower frame direction.

  First, FIGS. 106 (A) to 106 (C) show the stop modes of the reels 301a to 301c based on the stop operation to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, which are the same as FIGS. 76 (A) to (C). Therefore, explanation is omitted. As shown in FIG. 106C, when all the reels 301 are stopped, the basic display area is a symbol display area, and in this area, the middle line corresponds to the condition device of “Lip 5_1”. The symbol combination “Replay-BAR-Watermelon” is displayed, and the symbol combination of bell symbols is displayed on the upper line (bell replay).

  Then, after entering the stopped state of FIG. 106 (C), the movable frame 522 is moved to open the symbol display area outside the frame (FIG. 106 (D)). Specifically, by moving the movable frame 522 downward by one symbol from the normal frame position without changing its shape, the symbol display area becomes the shape (reel 3) of the previous symbol display area. The area below the frame is displayed for one symbol (for one line) on each reel while maintaining the book × three symbols). When moving as shown in FIG. 106, the movable frame 522 may be formed in a fixed frame shape because it is not necessary to change the shape of the symbol display area during movement.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (D), as a result of the symbol display area being changed, in the symbol display area after the change, a line (frame lower stage line) hidden one stage lower than the lower line in the basic display area is displayed. The degree of identification of a symbol (outside frame symbol) that is exposed and located on the exposed line changes. Specifically, before changing the symbol display area, the symbols outside the frame that had not been identified by the player before the symbol change (cherry-watermelon-replay in order from the left column) can be identified. The symbol combinations including the cherry symbols in the left column are displayed in an identifiable manner in the lower line of the symbol display area (lower frame line of the basic display area). For the symbols (cherry-watermelon-replay in order from the left column) that are stopped at the bottom of the frame of each column (each line) when in the stop mode of FIG. 106 (C), see the arrangement diagram of FIG. Can be confirmed.

  Further, as described above in the first example, the display line of the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display area changes due to the change in the correspondence of the display lines accompanying the change of the symbol display area. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 106C before the symbol display area is changed, the bell symbol alignment is displayed on the upper line as a characteristic symbol combination. In D), when a cherry symbol newly appears in the lower row of the left column, a symbol combination including the cherry symbol is displayed. In addition, the symbol combination “Replay-BAR-Watermelon” in the original middle line is displayed on the upper line, and the bell pattern alignment is hidden from the player.

(3) Third Modification Example of Symbol Display Area FIG. 107 is a diagram for describing a third modification example of the symbol display area. 107A to 107D, the symbol display area is changed so as to expand in one direction (for example, the frame upward direction), and the out-of-frame symbol area opened by the change extends over a plurality of reels. An example of stopping is shown. Specifically, FIGS. 107A to 107D show a stop mode when a stop operation is performed by middle reverse pressing when BAR_1 is selected.

  First, FIGS. 107A to 107C show a stop mode of the reels 301a to 301c based on a stop operation to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, and are the same as FIGS. 73A to 73C. Therefore, explanation is omitted. As shown in FIG. 107 (C), when all the reels 301 are stopped, the basic display area is a symbol display area, and in this area, the middle line corresponds to the condition device of “Lip 26_1”. The symbol combination “Bell-Watermelon-BAR” is displayed, but no other characteristic symbol combination is displayed.

  Then, after the stop state of FIG. 107C, the movable frame 522 is moved, and the symbol display area outside the frame is released (FIG. 107D). Specifically, the movable frame 522 moves (deforms) so that the left and right parts of the frame are expanded upward by one symbol without deforming other portions from the normal frame position. The area is expanded from the shape of the previous symbol display area (3 reels x 3 levels of symbols) (3 reels x 4 levels of symbols), and in addition to the basic display area so far, 1 symbol is stored in each reel. The area above the frame is displayed for (one line).

  As shown in FIG. 107 (D), as a result of changing the symbol display area, in the symbol display area after the change, a line (frame upper stage line) hidden one level higher than the upper line in the basic display area is displayed. The degree of identification of a symbol (outside frame symbol) that is exposed and located on the exposed line changes. Specifically, before the symbol display area is changed, the symbols outside the frame (BAR-bell-bell in order from the left column) stopped in the upper frame that could not be identified by the player can be identified. At this time, by connecting the newly identified “BAR symbol” in the left column and the “BAR symbol” displayed in the upper middle row and the middle right column of the basic display area before the change, In the symbol display area, a symbol combination of BAR symbols is displayed in a identifiable manner on a straight line in the downward direction from the uppermost row of the left column (a “bottom right downward line” described later). For the symbols (BAR-Bell-Bell in order from the left column) that are stopped at the upper frame of each column (each line) when in the stop mode of FIG. 107 (C), refer to the arrangement diagram of FIG. Can be confirmed.

  Further, as described above in the first example, the display line of the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display area changes due to the change in the correspondence of the display lines accompanying the change of the symbol display area. In particular, in the third example, unlike the first example and the second example in which the shape is maintained, the shape of the symbol display area after the change is expanded by one symbol for each reel. Become more prominent. Specifically, not only the display line on which the symbol combination is displayed changes, but also the number of display lines.

  107 (C) and 107 (D), when a specific symbol stop mode associated with a change in the symbol display area is compared, an out-of-frame region of the upper frame line is expanded, so that Since the out-of-frame symbols that are stopped in the region can be newly identified, a display line using the out-of-frame symbols is added. The display lines added here are, for example, “the upper frame line” that connects the upper frames horizontally, “the lower right line on the frame” that connects the upper left column frame, the upper middle column, and the middle right column, and , It can be referred to as a “upward and rightward line on the frame” formed by connecting the middle of the left column—the upper middle column—the upper column of the right column. That is, compared to the five display lines (upper line, middle line, lower line, lower right line, and right upper line) in FIG. 107 (C), three display lines are added in FIG. 107 (D). (The total number of display lines is 8). And in FIG. 107 (C) before the change of the symbol display area, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 26_1” is not displayed on the middle line, In FIG. 107 (D) after the symbol display area has been changed, a symbol combination with the same BAR symbol is newly displayed on the right down line on the frame.

(4) Fourth Modification Example of Symbol Display Area FIG. 108 is a diagram for describing a fourth modification example of the symbol display area. 108 (A) to (D), the symbol display area is changed so as to expand in both directions (above and below the frame), and the out-of-frame symbol area opened by the change is divided into a plurality of reels. An example of stopping when straddling is shown. Specifically, FIGS. 108A to 108D show a stop mode when a stop operation is performed by pressing in the middle order when winning out of frame 1_A.

  First, FIGS. 108A to 108C show a stop mode of the reels 301a to 301c based on a stop operation to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, which are the same as FIGS. 78A to 78C. Therefore, explanation is omitted. Although omitted in FIG. 78, all stop symbols are shown in FIG. 108 by adding stop symbols other than the middle line. As shown in FIG. 108 (C), when all the reels 301 are stopped, the basic display area is the symbol display area, and in this area, the middle line corresponds to the condition device of “Rip 12_3”. The symbol combination “red 7-replay-cherry” is displayed, and the symbol combination including the cherry symbol in the lower left column is displayed.

  Then, after the stop state of FIG. 108 (C), the movable frame 522 is moved, and the symbol display area outside the frame is released (FIG. 108 (D)). Specifically, when the movable frame 522 moves (deforms) from the normal frame position so that the left and right parts of the frame are expanded by one symbol each in the vertical direction, the symbol display area displays the symbol display up to that point. Expanded from the shape of the area (3 reels x 3 stages of symbols) (3 reels x 5 stages of symbols), in addition to the basic display area so far, each reel has one symbol above and below the frame. The area of (one line) is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (D), as a result of changing the symbol display area, in the symbol display area after the change, a line (frame upper stage line) hidden one level higher than the upper stage line in the basic display area The line hidden below the lower line in the basic display area (the lower frame line) is exposed, and the degree of identification of the symbol (outside frame symbol) located on the exposed line changes. Specifically, before the change of the symbol display area, the symbols outside the frame (bell-watermelon-red 7 in order from the left column) stopped at the upper frame that could not be identified by the player, and stopped at the lower frame. The out-of-frame symbols (watermelon-cherry-watermelon in order from the left column) can be identified. At this time, the “red 7 symbol” on the right column frame newly made identifiable is connected to the “red 7 symbol” displayed in the middle left column and the upper middle column of the basic display area before the change. Thus, in the symbol display area after the change, the symbol combination of the seven red symbols is displayed in an identifiable manner on a straight line in the upward direction from the middle left column to the uppermost column in the right column (upward right line on the frame). In addition, when it is in the stop mode of FIG. 108 (C), it has stopped at the symbol (bell-watermelon-red 7 in order from the left column) or the frame lower stage of each row (each line). The symbols (watermelon-cherry-watermelon in order from the left column) can be confirmed from the arrangement diagram of FIG.

  Further, as described above in the first example, the display line of the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display area changes due to the change in the correspondence of the display lines accompanying the change of the symbol display area. Particularly in the fourth example, since the shape of the symbol display area after the change is expanded as in the third example, the change in the correspondence relationship of the display lines becomes more remarkable. Specifically, not only the display line on which the symbol combination is displayed changes, but also the number of display lines.

  Referring to FIGS. 108 (C) and 108 (D), when the specific pattern stop mode accompanying the change of the symbol display area is compared, the out-of-frame area of the upper frame line and the lower frame line is expanded. As a result, the out-of-frame symbol stopped in the out-of-frame region can be newly identified, and a display line using this out-of-frame symbol is added. The display lines added here are "upper frame line", "upper right frame lower line", and "upper right frame line" as display lines related to the upper frame line design. Related display lines are “frame lower line”, “frame lower right line”, and “frame lower right line”. That is, compared with the five display lines (upper line, middle line, lower line, lower right line, and right upper line) in FIG. 108 (C), six display lines are added in FIG. 108 (D). (The total number of display lines is 11). In FIG. 108 (C) before the change of the symbol display area, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 12 — 3” (red 7-replay-cherry) is displayed on the middle line, and the cherry symbol in the lower left column is displayed. The symbol combination that was included was displayed, but in Fig. 108 (D) after the symbol display area has been changed, in addition to such a symbol combination, a symbol combination with a red 7 symbol alignment is newly displayed on the upper right line on the frame. Is done.

(5) Fifth Modification Example of Symbol Display Area FIG. 109 is a diagram for describing a fifth modification example of the symbol display area. The first to fourth modification examples are stop examples in the case where the out-of-frame symbol area straddling all reels is released by the modification of the symbol display area. In the fifth modification example, the symbol display area is changed. Shows a stop example when the out-of-frame symbol area is opened only by a predetermined reel. Specifically, FIGS. 109A to 109D show a stop mode when a stop operation is performed by pressing in the middle order when BAR_1 is selected.

  First, FIGS. 109A to 109C show a stop mode of the reels 301a to 301c based on a stop operation to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, which are the same as FIGS. 72A to 72C. Therefore, explanation is omitted. As shown in FIG. 109 (C), when all the reels 301 are stopped, the basic display area is the symbol display area, and in this area, the middle line corresponds to the condition device of “Lip 24_1”. The symbol combination “BAR-watermelon-plum a” is displayed, but no other characteristic symbol combination is displayed.

  Then, after entering the stopped state of FIG. 109 (C), the movable frame 522 is moved to open the symbol display area outside the frame (FIG. 109 (D)). Specifically, by moving (deforming) the movable frame 522 so that only the frame position of the right row (right reel 301c) is expanded by one symbol in the upward direction of the frame, the symbol display area The shape of the symbol display area (three reels x three symbols) has been transformed into a shape with one symbol (one step) added to the right column frame. As a result, in addition to the basic display area so far, An area outside the frame for one symbol is displayed on the upper side of the right frame.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (D), as a result of the change of the symbol display area, in the symbol display area after the change, the out-of-frame area hidden one step above the upper right column in the basic display area is exposed. The identification degree of the symbol (outside frame symbol) located in the outside frame region changes. Specifically, the BAR symbol can be identified as an out-of-frame symbol that has stopped at the upper stage of the right column frame that cannot be identified by the player before the symbol display area is changed. At this time, by connecting the “BAR symbol” on the right column frame newly made identifiable with the “BAR symbol” displayed on the middle left column and the middle column before the change, In the symbol display area after the change, the BAR symbol-aligned symbol combinations are displayed in an identifiable manner on a straight line in the upward direction from the middle left column to the uppermost column in the right column (upward right line on the frame). It can be confirmed from the arrangement diagram of FIG. 46 that the BAR symbol is stopped at the upper stage of the right column when in the stop mode of FIG. 109 (C).

  Further, as described above in the first example, the display line of the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display area changes due to the change in the correspondence of the display lines accompanying the change of the symbol display area. In particular, in the fifth example, the line-shaped out-of-frame area is not opened across a plurality of reels as in the first to fourth examples, but a predetermined out-of-frame area in a specific reel (in this case, the symbol 1 in the right reel 301c). In this case, not only can the shape of the symbol display area be changed, but also the display lines that can display symbol combinations can be changed. it can.

  Referring to FIG. 109 (C) and FIG. 109 (D), when a specific pattern stop mode accompanying a change in the symbol display area is compared, the out-of-frame area on the right column frame is expanded, Since the out-of-frame symbol stopped in the out-of-frame region can be newly identified, a display line using the out-of-frame symbol is added. The display line added here is a “upward and rightward line on the frame” connecting from the middle left column to the upper right frame. That is, one display line is added in FIG. 109 (D) as compared to the five display lines (upper line, middle line, lower line, lower right line, and right upper line) in FIG. 109 (C). (The total number of display lines is 6). In FIG. 109 (C) before the change of the symbol display area, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination (BAR-watermelon-watermelon) corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 24_1” is displayed in the middle line. Although not displayed, in FIG. 109 (D) after the symbol display area is changed, a symbol combination with the same BAR symbol is newly displayed on the upper right line on the frame.

  As described above, with reference to FIGS. 105 to 109, the example of changing the symbol display area in which the open degree of the out-of-frame area is 3 is shown. It is not limited to an example, and an arbitrary change pattern can be set within a range in which the movable frame 522 can move. For example, the deformation pattern may be a combination of the above examples, or the width of the open outside frame may be set to two or more stages instead of one pattern. Also, there is no need for one frame variation condition for the movement of the movable frame 522, and a plurality of frame variation conditions having different pattern display area deformation patterns (that is, operation patterns of the movable frame 522) are prepared. Then, the symbol display area may be deformed based on the established frame variation condition.

  However, regardless of the change pattern, when the symbol display area is changed by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the predetermined out-of-frame area is released, and the degree of identification of the out-of-frame symbols located in the out-of-frame area is changed. Can be made.

[12-3. Changing the symbol display area from the old display area]
As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment corresponds to the normal symbol display area (basic display area by opening the out-of-frame area with an opening degree of 2 or more. Is also changed to a new symbol display area including the out-of-frame area (referred to as a “new display area” relative to the “old display area”).

  Here, when the old display area is used as a reference, the change of the symbol display area by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained” or “the old display area is destroyed. It has a feature of “change of symbol display area”. Below, the change of the symbol display area seen from such an old display area is demonstrated.

[12-3-1. Maintain old display area]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained” means that the symbol display area before the change (in the old display area) in the symbol display area after the change (new display area). Yes, which corresponds to the basic display area) means a change of the symbol display area so as to be identifiable from the player. When the symbol display area is changed in this way, the symbol display area is expanded because the new display area includes all the old display areas. Hereinafter, the change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained will be described with reference to a specific example of changing the symbol display area. In each figure, the symbol display area corresponds to an area partitioned by the symbol display window 524.

  First, for example, in FIG. 56 described above, as an example of the changed symbol display area (new display area), in addition to the basic display area 524a which is the old display area, the out-of-frame area of the upper frame line can be visually recognized. The displayed symbol display window 524 is shown. In other words, centering on the symbols, the three symbols positioned in the upper line of the frame (the “bell symbol” in order from the left column) while the nine symbols positioned in the basic display area 524a are maintained in an identifiable state. , “Cherry symbol”, “bell symbol”) are additionally displayed so as to be newly identifiable.

  As a specific control processing example for changing to the symbol display area shown in FIG. 56, the upper movable frame member 522a is moved upward from the fixed position in the normal game mode by one step of the symbol. An out-of-frame line (upper frame line) for one step above the frame of the display area 524a can be opened.

  Further, for example, in FIG. 60 described above, as another example of the changed symbol display area (new display area), in addition to the basic display area 524a which is the old display area, the frame upper line and the frame lower line are out of the frame. A symbol display window 524 in which the area is visible is shown. In other words, the three symbols (specifically, the left column) that were positioned on the upper line of the frame while maintaining the state in which the nine symbols positioned in the basic display area 524a are identifiable. "Bell design", "Cherry design", "Bell design") and three symbols that were located on the bottom line of the frame ("Watermelon design", "Bell design", "Cherry design" in order from the left column) )) Is additionally displayed so as to be newly identifiable. In addition, the number of display lines is increased due to the addition of the distinguishable symbols. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 60, there are five linear display lines before the change, but the number of linear display lines after the change increases to 11. In the case of FIG. 56 described above, the number increases from 5 to 8.

  As a specific control processing example for changing to the symbol display area shown in FIG. 60, the upper movable frame member 522a is moved upward by one symbol from the fixed position in the normal game mode and moved downward. By moving the frame member 522b downward from the fixed position in the normal game mode by one step of the symbol, the frame outside line (the frame upper step line) for the upper step of the basic display region 524a and the step of the lower frame portion It is possible to open the line outside the frame (line below the frame).

  56 and 60 illustrated above are examples in which the out-of-frame area is opened by “stage lines” straddling all the reels 301a to 301c while the basic display area is maintained. 102, 103, 107 (D), and 108 (D) show similar change patterns.

  As described above in [12-2] (5) and the like, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the out-of-frame area that is opened when the symbol display area is changed is not necessarily limited to the “stage line”. For example, each reel 301a to 301c may have an area for each symbol as a unit. Hereinafter, in such a case, it will be referred to as the “out-of-frame region” being released in “design units”. A change pattern in which the non-frame area is released in “design units” while the basic display area is maintained will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining an example of changing the symbol display area in which the basic display area is maintained. FIG. 110 shows an example of a symbol display mode after the symbol display area is changed. The stop mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 110 is the same as the stop mode shown in FIG. 109 (D), and details regarding the change of the symbol display area are shown in FIGS. 109 (A) to (D). As explained.

  However, in FIG. 110, upper movable frame members 522c, 522d, and 522e are shown instead of the upper movable frame member 522a shown in FIG. 56 and the like in order to enable the symbol display area to be shielded / opened in units of symbols. Has been. The upper movable frame members 522c, 522d, and 522e are provided on the upper side of the basic display area 524a so as to correspond to the left row (left reel 301a), the middle row (middle reel 301b), and the right row (right reel 301c) in order. The upper movable frame member is an accessory that can move so as to shield or open a part of the area where each column (left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) is displayed.

  Such upper movable frame members 522c, 522d, and 522e are an example of the movable frame 522 that enables the symbol display area to be shielded / opened in symbol units, and enables similar shielding / opening. If it is a structure, you may be comprised by another member. For example, the upper movable frame member 522a may be integrated and movable with each reel width. The same applies to lower movable frame members 522f, 522g, and 522h described later.

  In FIG. 110, as an example of the changed symbol display area (new display area), in addition to the basic display area 524a which is the old display area, the symbol display window 524 in which the outer frame area in the upper stage of the right column frame is made visible. It is shown. In other words, centering on the symbol, one symbol (specifically, “BAR symbol”) located in the upper row of the right column frame while maintaining the state in which the nine symbols located in the basic display area 524a are identifiable. ]) Is additionally displayed so as to be identifiable.

  As a specific control processing example for changing to the symbol display area shown in FIG. 110, the upper movable frame member 522e is moved upward from the fixed position in the normal game mode by one symbol. It is possible to open an out-of-frame area (upper right column frame) for the upper frame in the right column of the display region 524a.

  Here, to supplement the display mode of the symbols shown in FIG. 110, as described in FIGS. 109 (C) and 109 (D), the basic display area 524a, which is the old display area, has a condition device of “Lip 24_1”. Other than the combination of symbols corresponding to, the special symbol display mode is displayed (for example, any symbol alignment on the display line stops or the cherry symbol stops on the left column) Not. However, in the new display area (symbol display window 524 in FIG. 110), a symbol combination of BAR symbols aligned is displayed in a newly rising line on the frame so as to be newly identifiable.

  FIG. 110 shows a change pattern in which only the upper row of the right row frame is opened by the movement of the upper movable frame member 522e. However, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the outside frame region is released while the basic display region is maintained. The upper movable frame members 522c, 522d, and 522e may be arbitrarily moved to open the upper frame of each row. Furthermore, the openable region is not limited to the upper side of the frame. For example, when the lower frame side can be opened, the upper movable frame members 522c, 522d, and 522e are provided in place of the upper movable frame member 522a, and each row is supported instead of the lower movable frame member 522b. The lower movable frame member (for example, the lower movable frame members 522f, 522g, and 522h) may be provided below the basic display area 524a.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment opens the symbol display area as described in each of the above figures (FIGS. 56, 60, 110, etc.), so that the old machine can be visually recognized by the player. The symbol display area can be expanded in such a manner that the outside of the frame (outside frame area) of the old display area can be newly recognized while maintaining the display area (that is, the basic display area).

  Then, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, the symbol (outside the frame) located in the newly opened outside frame region while maintaining the degree of identification with respect to the symbol located in the basic display region (while being identifiable). In general, it is possible to identify a larger number of symbols in the expanded new display area than in the old display area.

  Here, the conventional gaming machine has been devised in a direction that makes it easy to notice the symbol combination indicating the game result. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display area is expanded and there are many new display areas. This makes it easy to identify the symbols, and it is possible to create a situation in which it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance what symbol combinations are displayed. Then, by making it possible to provide such a situation, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of searching for symbol combinations. While searching for a symbol combination, the player's interest is directed to the symbol display, so that the player's interest can be attracted for a long time.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is maintained”, a new effect is obtained while ensuring the effect of the conventional basic display area. The effect by the out-of-frame line created can be additionally obtained. For example, when a specific symbol combination is displayed in the basic display area, even if the symbol display area is changed, the display of the specific symbol combination is maintained, so that the game is displayed by displaying the specific symbol combination. Improvement of interest given to the elderly is ensured. In addition, by creating an out-of-frame line and displaying the symbol combination on the out-of-frame line, both effects can be obtained.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display area is expanded by performing “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is maintained”, so that the number of symbols to be displayed increases. In addition, the number of display lines of the symbol combination can be increased. By extending the display line in this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the new display area (display success), and it can be expected to improve the interest of the player. Moreover, the expectation to the privilege which can be provided when a predetermined symbol combination is successfully displayed can be enhanced.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is maintained” is performed, the out-of-frame area is released without interference with the basic display area. The player can be particularly focused on the movement of the out-of-frame area. In the conventional gaming machine, it has been impossible to give a large meaning to the out-of-frame area where the symbols cannot be visually recognized. However, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a novel that makes the player interested in the out-of-frame area. Gameability can be realized.

[12-3-2. Destruction of old display area]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed” means that the symbol display area before the change (in the old display area) in the symbol display area after the change (new display area). Yes, which means that the symbol display area is changed so that a part of the display area is shielded from being visible to the player. When such a change of the symbol display area is performed, the new display area includes the old display area that is not shielded and the open out-of-frame area. Since the size of the new display area depends on the size of the shielded old display area and the size of the released out-of-frame area, it can be reduced, maintained, or expanded as compared with the old display area. .

  Hereinafter, the change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed (in other words, the change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed) will be described with reference to a specific modification example of the symbol display area. . In each figure, the symbol display area corresponds to an area partitioned by the symbol display window 524.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram for describing a first example of changing the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed. FIG. 111 shows an example of a symbol display mode after the symbol display area is changed. The symbol stop mode shown in FIG. 111 is the same as the stop mode shown in FIG. 105 (D), and details regarding the change of the symbol display area are shown in FIGS. 105 (A) to (D). As explained.

  In FIG. 111, as an example of the symbol display area (new display area) after the change, the lower line area is shielded from the basic display area 524a, which is the old display area, while the upper line of the frame is not visible. A symbol display window 524 in which the out-of-frame region is visible is shown. In other words, the symbols constituting the lower line out of the nine symbols positioned in the basic display area 524a are shielded in an invisible state (the upper line is called the middle line). 6 symbols remain in a distinguishable state), and 3 symbols (specifically, “watermelon symbols” in each column) that were located on the upper line of the frame are additionally displayed to be newly identifiable. Has been.

  As a specific control processing example for changing to the symbol display area shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable frame member 522b is moved upward from the fixed position in the normal game mode by one step of the symbol. The lower display line of the display area 524a is shielded from being visible to the player, and the upper movable frame member 522a is moved upward by one stage from the fixed position in the normal game mode to thereby display the basic display area 524a. It is possible to open the line outside the frame (upper frame line) for one step above the frame.

  Here, to supplement the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 111, as described in FIGS. 105 (C) and 105 (D), the basic display area 524a which is the old display area has a condition device of “Lip 1”. A replay symbol set is displayed on the middle line as a symbol combination corresponding to. On the other hand, after the symbol display area is changed, in the new display area (symbol display window 524 in FIG. 111), a combination of watermelon symbols is newly identifiable in the upper frame line.

  In the example of FIG. 111, when the symbol display area is changed, the shielding amount and shielding direction with respect to the old display area and the opening amount and opening direction with respect to the out-of-frame area are substantially the same amount (specifically, one symbol for the symbol). Therefore, the shape of the symbol display area hardly changes before and after the change. For this reason, by changing the symbol display area, it is possible to give the impression that the symbol display window having the size of “three reels × three symbols” has been slid upward by one step without changing its shape. At this time, in the display window after the slide, the replay symbol alignment originally displayed on the middle line is displayed on the lower line, and the watermelon symbol alignment not originally displayed is newly displayed on the upper line. It is possible to realize a novel symbol display.

  FIG. 111 described above is an example of a change pattern in which a part of the basic display area is shielded while the “outline” area outside the frame is opened. The same applies to FIG. 106 (D) described above. It can be said that this is a change pattern. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the out-of-frame area that is opened when the symbol display area is changed is not necessarily limited to the “stage line”. Hereinafter, as another change pattern, a change pattern in which the out-of-frame area is released in “design units” will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113.

  112 and 113 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining a second example of the change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed. FIG. 112 shows an example of a symbol display mode before the symbol display region is changed, and FIG. 113 shows an example of a symbol display mode after the symbol display region is changed. The stop mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 112 is the same as the stop mode shown in FIG. However, in FIG. 113, since the symbol display area is changed in a manner different from that in FIG. 108, the shape of the new display area is different from that in FIG.

  In the case of FIGS. 112 and 113, since the area is changed in “design units” instead of the area change (shielding / opening) in the “stage line”, the upper movable frame member 522a is used as the movable frame 522. Instead, upper movable frame members 522c, 522d, and 522e are provided, and lower movable frame members 522f, 522g, and 522h are provided instead of the lower movable frame member 522b. Such a configuration is the same as that in FIG. 110 of [12-3-1], and thus the details are omitted.

  In FIG. 112 before the symbol display area is changed, the symbol corresponding to the condition device of “Lip 12 — 3” in the rectangular symbol display window 524 (old display area, basic display area) capable of displaying three reels × three stages of symbols. The combination is displayed in the middle line. In addition, cherry symbols are displayed in the lower row of the left column.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 113 after the symbol display area is changed, the symbol area in the upper left column and the symbol area in the lower right column are shielded from being visually invisible with respect to the basic display area 524a which is the old display area. In addition, a symbol display window 524 is shown in which an out-of-frame region at the lower stage of the left column frame and an out-of-frame area at the upper stage of the right column frame are visible. The symbol display window 524 in FIG. 113 is the same as before the change in that the three reels can display three steps of the symbol, but the shape is a step-up shape that rises to the right, unlike the rectangle before the change. Become.

  As a specific control processing example for changing to the symbol display area shown in FIG. 113, the upper movable frame member 522c and the lower movable frame member 522f are designed from the fixed position in the normal game mode with respect to the left reel 301a. By moving downward by one step, the symbol region in the upper left column of the basic display region 524a is shielded, and the out-of-frame region (lower column in the lower left column) corresponding to one step below the left column frame is opened. Further, neither the upper movable frame member 522d nor the lower movable frame member 522g is moved relative to the middle reel 301b. For the right reel 301c, the upper movable frame member 522e and the lower movable frame member 522h are moved upward from the fixed positions in the normal game mode by one stage of the symbol, so that the right column of the basic display area 524a The lower symbol area is shielded and the outer frame area (upper right frame) of the upper right frame is opened.

  In such a new display area of FIG. 113, a symbol combination of red 7 symbols aligned is additionally displayed in a line that rises to the right from the upper stage so as to be newly identifiable. In addition, the cherry symbols displayed in the lower left column in the old display area are displayed in the middle in the left column in the new display area.

  112 and 113, when the symbol display area is changed, for each reel 301, the shielding amount and shielding direction for the old display area and the opening amount and opening / closing direction for the out-of-frame area are substantially the same. The shielding amount / opening amount differs between the reels 301 (specifically, the left reel 301a and the right reel 301c have one symbol and the middle reel 301b has no movement amount). As a result, there is no change in the total number of symbols and the number of display lines displayed in the symbol display area before and after the change, but the shape changes in such a manner that it is inclined from a rectangle to a parallelogram.

  112 and 113, the upper and lower lines shown in FIG. 112 are tilted in the upper right direction in FIG. 113 due to such a change of the symbol display area (the upper line is a line that rises to the upper right on the frame). And an image in which the lower line changes to a line that rises to the lower right of the frame) can be given to the player, and a novel symbol display mode can be realized.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment opens the symbol display area as described in the above drawings (FIGS. 111, 113, etc.), and thus the old display area (that is, the basic display area) The symbol display area is changed in such a way that the old display area (basic display area) is destroyed by partially blocking the player from being visible, and the outside of the old display area (out-of-frame area) is newly visible. can do.

  Then, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the position of the symbol located in the basic display area is changed (making a part indistinguishable) and positioned in the newly opened out-of-frame area. Since the symbol to be displayed (the symbol outside the frame) can be exposed in a generally identifiable manner, the symbol that can be easily identified by the player can be changed from the old display region in the new display region. Then, by performing both shielding and opening of the area, a symbol display area with a high degree of freedom can be formed.

  In order to form a symbol display area with a high degree of freedom, the symbol display area is not partitioned by a fixing member as in a conventional gaming machine, but at least one as in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The symbol display area needs to be partitioned by a movable member (movable frame 522) at the portion. And, as described separately, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is preferable that a movable member is used at least in part for the section of the basic display area. The change pattern of destruction of the basic display area can be easily realized.

  Also, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed”, a novel display mode (display that has not been found in a conventional gaming machine) Format). In detail, the basic display area that was fixed in the past is destroyed by being partially shielded, and the novel that the area outside the frame that was previously invisible is opened, It can be realized together.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed” is performed, so that the ratio of the visible basic display area in the new display area is reduced. Thus, it is possible to create a new out-of-frame line so as to be visible. In general, a player's attention is likely to gather in the created area, and it is easy to hold the expectation that something will be displayed in the created area. Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the created out-of-frame line and to have a sense of expectation that a predetermined symbol combination may be displayed on the out-of-frame line. .

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the interest for the out-of-frame line is improved, and the player's attention is also attracted to the basic display area left unshielded in the new display area. Can be made. That is, since the player can feel some important meaning for the non-shielded area in the basic display area, the player's attention can be gathered. For example, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the non-shielded area, etc., it is expected that the provision of a privilege due to the display of the symbol combination has an expectation higher than usual. it can.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when “change of the symbol display area that destroys the basic display area” is performed, operations with different directions such as interference with the basic display area and release with respect to the out-of-frame area are performed. Therefore, the player's attention can be drawn to the entire symbol display area including the basic display area and the out-of-frame area. Conventionally, when a relatively conspicuous symbol combination is displayed, the player's interest in other symbols and symbol combinations tends to decrease, but the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment provides a novel display mode. By doing so, the player can be interested in the entire symbol display area including the out-of-frame area that is originally invisible.

  In the above-described “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed”, a part of the old display area is shielded by the movable frame 522. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is shielded. It is desirable to control so that the display area indicating the effective line is not included in the area (shielding area). In other words, it is desirable to control the movement of the movable frame 522 so as to shield at least a part of the old display area (basic display area 524a) other than the display area indicating the effective line. By performing such control, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a part of the old display area is shielded due to the change of the symbol display area, the symbol combination displayed on the effective line is played. Can recognize.

  In addition, in the “change of the symbol display area in which the basic display area is destroyed”, when the control is performed so that the display area indicating the effective line is shielded from the old display area, the effective line is stopped before and after the shielding. As long as the degree of identification of the existing symbol (that is, the symbol on the active line) does not change, there is no problem. When such control is performed, even if the display area indicating the effective line is partially blocked by the shielding of the old display area, the degree of identification of the symbols on the effective line is maintained without change. The player can recognize the symbol combination displayed on the screen.

[13. Features and effects of this embodiment]
A characteristic configuration and expected effects of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above will be described together.

(1) 1st characteristic and effect The slot machine 1 of this embodiment is comprised about the symbol display area which can visually recognize a part of reel 301 from the front so that the frame part which divides a symbol display area can be moved. (Specifically, the reel display device 520, the movable frame 522, and the like) and the symbol display area are variable. In conventional general gaming machines, the symbol display area is fixed to the basic display area, and in each game, the stop mode of the symbols attached to the reels that are variably stopped is only displayed in the basic display area. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay such as a variable symbol display area.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display area is changed under the control of the effect control board 510, so that the external area (ie, corresponding to the basic display area 524a) of the normal mode symbol display area ( Out-of-frame area) is released. The opening of the out-of-frame region is performed to such a degree that the degree of identification with respect to the symbol (out-of-frame design) located in the out-of-frame region can be changed. As a result, it is possible to create another display area different from the basic display area (for example, a new display area corresponding to the “outside frame symbol display area” described above).

  And according to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, by creating a new display area in this way, it becomes possible for the player to be aware of the presence of a symbol (outside the frame symbol) stopped outside the frame. . Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the out-of-frame symbols are merely invisible symbols located outside the basic display area, and are not directly related to the game. As a result, in the conventional gaming machine, as the game in which the stop symbol is displayed in the fixed symbol display area (basic display area) is repeated, the symbol combinations appearing in the symbol display area are recognized. Since there was a considerable tendency to end up, there was a risk that the player's interest in the display pattern of the stop symbol would decrease. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by making the player aware of the presence of the out-of-frame symbols as described above, it is possible to recognize the symbols related to the game and display them in the symbol display area. This makes it possible to more entertain the symbol stop mode.

  In addition, such an effect can be expected by realizing the purpose of raising awareness of out-of-frame symbols. When moving the movable frame 522 to achieve the purpose, the minimum display range of the new display area may be enough to make the player aware that the out-of-frame symbols are stopped outside the frame. There is no need to be concerned with the presence or absence of distinction with respect to symbols. Specifically, the manner of identifying the out-of-frame symbol associated with the opening of the out-of-frame area is as illustrated and described in FIG. 104 and the like, and the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area is at least “open degree 1” (see [12-1]. If it is above, a part of the symbol outside the frame can be exposed so as to be visible, and the player can be made aware that the symbol outside the frame is stopped (see, for example, FIG. 101).

(2) Second Features and Effects According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, by operating the reel display device 520 (especially the movable frame 522) according to the control of the effect control board 510, the symbol display in the normal mode. The symbol display area can be changed from the area (basic display area 524a) to a new symbol display area including an out-of-frame area of the basic display area 524a. Here, by setting the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area to “open degree 2” (see [12-1]) or more, the out-of-frame area located in the out-of-frame area in the out-of-frame area opened by changing the symbol display area. The design is exposed to the extent that it can be generally recognized (see, for example, FIG. 102). Here, “generally recognizable” corresponds to “a degree to which the symbol type can be identified almost certainly”. Further, when there is a similar symbol, it means that it is possible to identify which symbol among the similar symbols. Although it is not necessarily limited that all symbols attached to the reel 301 can be identified, it is preferable that at least a predetermined ratio (for example, 80%) or more of all symbols is easily identified.

  Since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the symbol display area in this manner, the exposed out-of-frame symbols are added to the symbols displayed in the symbol display area and recognized by the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to identify more symbols than the number of symbols appearing in the display area 524a. Specifically, for example, if 9 symbols of 3 reels × 3 symbols are displayed in the basic display area, and the lower frame line for one tier is exposed with an opening degree of 2 or more, each reel 301a˜ In 301c, since the symbols under the frame can be recognized one by one, a total of 12 symbols can be easily displayed.

  According to such a slot machine 1, a novel display means different from the conventional gaming machine is realized in that a symbol that has not been seen (a symbol outside the frame) can be seen beyond the original display area. The novel display means can be expected to improve the interest of the player. That is, by increasing the number of symbols that can be easily recognized by the player, it is possible to show various ways of stopping the symbols, which can be expected to increase the interest of the player.

(3) Third Features and Effects According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the reel display device 520 (particularly the movable frame 522), from the symbol display area (basic display area 524a) in the normal mode, The symbol display area can be changed to a new symbol display area including the out-of-frame area of the basic display area 524a. Here, by setting the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area to “open degree 2” (see [12-1]) or more, the out-of-frame area located in the out-of-frame area in the out-of-frame area opened by changing the symbol display area. The design is exposed to the extent that it can be recognized at least (see, for example, FIG. 102).

  Then, by exposing the out-of-frame symbols to a level that can be generally recognized, it is possible to create a display line for a new symbol combination including the exposed out-of-frame symbols. Compared with the basic display area which is the display area, the relationship of the display lines of the symbol combination can be changed. Here, the “relationship between the display lines of the symbol combination” is, for example, “the number of display lines of the symbol combination” or “the relative positional relationship of the display lines of the symbol combination”, and further, “the symbol combination is displayed. The “state displayed on the line” can also be expressed by the term “line mode”. That is, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the symbol display area is changed at an opening degree of 2 or more, the line pattern is changed in the symbol display area after the change compared to the line mode formed in the basic display area. At least one of the number of modes or the relative positional relationship of the line modes can be changed. This will be described in detail below using the specific examples described above.

  First, “the number of display lines of symbol combinations” will be described. If the basic display area 524a of “three reels × three stages of symbols” is taken as an example of the basic display area that is the symbol display area before the change, the display lines of the symbol combinations to be formed are limited to linear display lines. Even in this case, there are five lines: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, a lower right line, and an upper right line (see FIGS. 49 and 61). On the other hand, as the symbol display area after the change, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. If it is exposed to the extent that it can be obtained, it will be displayed as a linear display line that includes the exposed out-of-frame symbol (left column, middle column, and right column). Three lines, “Line” and “Right-up line on the frame” are newly created, and the number of symbol combination display lines in the symbol display area after the change is increased to 8 in total (see [12-2] (3)). . Thus, the number of display lines of a symbol combination can be changed (mainly increased) by creating a display line of a new symbol combination including an out-of-frame symbol exposed by changing the symbol display area.

  Next, “the relative positional relationship between the display lines of the symbol combination” will be described. As one of the change patterns of the symbol display area, the shape of the symbol display area before and after the change may be maintained (for example, FIG. 106). In FIG. 106 (D), when the symbol display area is changed, the lower frame line for one symbol is exposed, and the upper line of the basic display region is difficult to identify (shielded state). In such a case, the number of display lines of the symbol combination as described above remains unchanged, but the relative positional relationship of the display lines of the symbol combination is changed. This will be specifically described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, FIG. 106 shows a state in which the symbol combination (Replay-BAR-Watermelon) corresponding to the condition device “Lip 5_1” is stopped and displayed on the active line when the winning combination “Outside 1_A” is won. . Here, in FIG. 106C before the symbol display area is changed, the symbol combination (replay-BAR-watermelon) is displayed in the middle line. However, in FIG. 106D after the change of the symbol display area, the display position of the symbol combination is the same as the shape and size of the symbol display area before the change (three reels × three stages of symbols). It becomes the upper line. That is, it can be seen that the display line of the symbol combination is changed from the middle line to the upper line by changing the symbol display area, and the relative positional relationship of the display lines is changed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the symbol display area is changed at an opening degree of 2 or more, the correspondence relationship between the display lines of the symbol combination (the number of line modes or the relative positional relationship of the line modes). At least one of them) can be changed.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game is progressing in a fixed symbol display area as described above. Even if an irregular display line is set, a predetermined number of symbols that are variably stopped in the basic display area are used. There was no change in that it was a game. As a result, there is a considerable risk that players who are used to games will gradually get bored. On the other hand, since the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can change the correspondence of the display lines of the symbol combination as described above, the display mode of the symbol combination can be diversified by a novel method that has not been conventionally available. This is a gaming machine that has the effect of improving the gaming interest.

  According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment that can diversify the display mode of symbol combinations, for example, the correspondence of the display lines of symbol combinations can be changed, so that the position where a predetermined symbol combination is displayed is changed. You can expect a visual effect. Further, when the number of symbol combination display lines is increased, it can be expected that the expectation level (the symbol combination expectation level) that a predetermined symbol combination having a high value for the player is displayed will be increased. In addition, when reducing the number of symbol combination display lines, the player's interest is concentrated on the reduced specific display lines. It can be expected to have an effect of suppressing a decrease in gaming motivation.

  In addition, although the open degree of the out-of-frame area capable of realizing the above effect is set to the open degree 2 or more, when the open degree is 2, regarding the out-of-frame design located in the open out-of-frame area, the entire design cannot be seen. However, as described above, even if the entire symbol is not visible, it is possible to recognize the display line including the symbol because the player can recognize the display line including the symbol as a result. It can be shown more clearly that the corresponding line of the symbol combination is changed by changing the region. When the degree of openness is 3, the out-of-frame symbols located in the exposed out-of-frame region are made completely visible, so that the above effect can be realized more significantly than when the degree of openness is 2.

  The above-described effect is not limited to the case where the out-of-frame area is opened across a plurality of reels when the symbol display area is changed, and the same effect can be obtained when only the out-of-frame area of the predetermined reel 301 is opened. For example, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), when only the upper frame area of the right row (right reel 301c) is opened, one out-of-frame symbol in the upper row of the right row frame is exposed in an identifiable manner. Since a right-up line on the frame is created as a display line including the frame symbol, the display mode of the symbol combination can be changed before and after the symbol display area is changed.

(4) Fourth Features and Effects As described with reference to FIG. 62, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment operates the display frame drive motor 523 that provides driving force to the movable frame 522 of the reel display device 520. In addition, it is configured to be controlled by other than the main board 409 (for example, the effect control board 510), and the symbol display area is changed by moving the movable frame 522 as described above. According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the internal lottery process for determining the winning combination (step S3 in FIG. 92) and the reel stop process based on the result of the internal lottery (step S5 in FIG. 92) Although controlled by the main board 409), the process of changing the symbol display area is controlled by a sub board other than the main board 409 (for example, the effect control board 510), so that the sub board can be controlled from the player side. The display mode of the visually recognizable symbol can be determined.

  Conventionally, the slot machine gives the player the final game result depending on how the symbols attached to the reels that have been suspended in a variable manner are displayed (in other words, the display mode of the symbol combination in the symbol display area). Show. Here, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can determine the symbol display area in which the stop symbol is displayed by controlling the sub-board (for example, the effect control board 510), so that it can be recognized by the player. It can be said that this is a gaming machine in which the sub-board can control the game result that appears in a stable state.

  Note that the change timing of the symbol display area is not limited to after all the reels 301 are stopped, as described in the description of the “frame variation condition”, and may be, for example, immediately after the rotation of all the reels 301. . In such a case, the symbol display area is changed by the control of the effect control board 510 before the reel stop process is performed by the control of the main board 409, but is finally visible from the player. The display mode of the symbol combination appearing on the sub-board is controlled by the sub-board according to the symbol display area.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the symbol display area, the effect control board 510 does not change the gaming state controlled by the main board (the so-called internal lottery probability is changed). Neither) nor the reel stop position is moved. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-board (for example, the effect control board 510) uses the main board without changing the gaming state controlled by the main board or the result of the internal lottery drawn by the main board. This is a gaming machine that can display the result of the internal lottery and control the display of the game result.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment does not move the reel stop position described above after the result of the internal lottery drawn by the main board is displayed (removes the reel). In addition, it is possible to notify the result of the internal lottery and display the symbol combination using the new new display area, so that a privilege (for example, a game medal, etc.) given by the result of the internal lottery can be displayed. In addition to (payout), the gaming machine can also have the expectation of the privilege given when the symbol combination is displayed.

  Conventionally, since the main board of the gaming machine is limited in capacity, the main board has to be controlled within the capacity limit range, and the control processing that can be executed is limited. In particular, since there are many processes specified to be controlled by the main board, such as the internal lottery process (step S3), the reel rotation process (step S4), and the reel stop process (step S5) shown in FIG. It was difficult for the main substrate to freely perform other control processing within the range of the capacity.

  However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the change of the symbol display area is controlled by the sub board (for example, the effect control board 510), so that it appears in a state that can be recognized by the player. The sub board can control the game result in an initiative, and a gaming machine having a high degree of freedom in a limited capacity limit can be realized.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the above-described control processing related to the change of the symbol display area is controlled by a sub board other than the main board (main board 409), the sub board is not limited to the effect control board 510. It is also possible to configure so that a substrate having a margin in terms of processing capability and capacity is controlled, or controlled in a shared manner. By doing so, it can be expected to improve the processing efficiency of the entire slot machine 1. In addition, a dedicated sub-board may be mounted in order to perform a series of processes related to the change of the symbol display area. In such a case, the series of processes is modularized to further increase the processing efficiency. We can expect improvement.

(5) Fifth Feature and Effect The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the reel display device 520 (especially the movable frame 522) to be opened with the degree of opening of the outside frame area equal to or greater than “opening degree 2” (see [12-1]). By operating, the symbol display area can be changed from the old display area (basic display area 524a) in the normal mode to the new display area including the out-of-frame area of the basic display area 524a. When the change pattern is “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained” as described in [12-3-1], the old display area (basic display) in the new display area after the change. The new display area is extended to the external area (outside frame area) of the basic display area while maintaining the (area) area, and the symbols (outside frame patterns) located in the outside frame area are generally exposed to be identifiable. region It is possible to easily identify more symbols than the number of symbols appearing on the screen.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment maintains the degree of symbol identification in the basic display region in changing the symbol display area and makes the degree of identification of out-of-frame symbols variable to such an extent that the symbols can be generally recognized. In addition, since a novel display mode of a symbol can be realized in a new display region in which the symbol display region is changed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display effect in the basic display region is ensured by maintaining the basic display region when the symbol display region is changed. This has the same effect in the conventional gaming machine, but according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the new display area is expanded to an area outside the frame while ensuring such an effect. It is characteristic in that it also has an effect (for example, realization of a novel symbol display mode).

  Further, for example, when the new display area is greatly expanded compared to the old display area as in the symbol display area shown in FIG. 60, the number of easily identifiable symbols in the new display area can be greatly increased. it can. According to such a slot machine 1, the player can see at a glance what symbol combinations are displayed by expanding the symbol display area and making it easy to identify a large number of symbols in the new display region. It is possible to create a situation that is difficult to grasp. The slot machine 1 can provide such a situation to the player with the pleasure of searching for symbol combinations. While searching for a symbol combination, the player's interest is directed to the symbol display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player accustomed to the game from getting bored and to provide a gaming machine that attracts the player's interest for a long time. Can do.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the symbol display area, the basic display area is maintained, while the out-of-frame area is newly made visible. Since it is created as an area, it is possible to feel the importance of the area outside the frame and attract the player's interest to the area outside the frame. That is, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a novel gameability that gives a sense of expectation to an out-of-frame area that has not had any meaning in the progress of the game.

(6) Sixth Features and Effects The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the reel display device 520 (especially the movable frame 522) to be opened with a degree of opening of the outside frame area equal to or greater than “opening degree 2” (see [12-1]). By operating it, the new display area after the change can be exposed to the extent that the symbols (out-of-frame symbols) located in the newly opened outside-of-frame area can be generally recognized. When the change pattern of the area is “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained” as described in [12-3-1], the old display area ( A new display line (out-of-frame line) including the out-of-frame symbol can be created while maintaining the display line in the basic display area.

  In other words, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment as described above maintains the basic display area so as to be visible by changing the symbol display area, and creates an out-of-frame symbol visible in the external area of the basic display area. As a result, it is possible to add a new line mode while securing a predetermined line mode formed in the old display area (basic display area). Further, in the entire symbol display area, the line correspondence is made variable before and after the symbol display area is changed.

  According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of display lines can be reliably increased by changing the symbol display area (display line expansion). And since the display mode of the symbol combination shown on the display line in a new display area can be diversified by expansion of a display line, there exists an effect which improves the interest of a player.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, the display line is expanded, so that the expectation that a predetermined symbol combination is displayed (successful display) in the new display area can be enhanced. it can. Specifically, in the example of FIG. 60, the number of linear display lines was five in the old display area, but was 11 in the new display area, but the more display lines there are. Since it is felt that a predetermined symbol combination is likely to appear, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a successful display, and to improve the interest of the player. Moreover, the expectation to the privilege which can be provided when a predetermined symbol combination is successfully displayed can be enhanced.

(7) Seventh Features and Effects In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the change of the symbol display area is controlled by a sub board (for example, the effect control board 510) other than the main board (main board 409). 2 ”(refer to [12-1]) In the case of performing“ changing the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained ”as described in [12-3-1] with the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area above The symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can appear on the effective line in the symbol display area is controlled by the main substrate when controlled by a sub-board (for example, the effect control board 510) other than the main board (main board 409). However, the sub-board can control the display mode of the combination of symbols to be recognizable from the player in the symbol display area. And according to such a slot machine 1 of this embodiment, without changing the display mode (this is displayed in the basic display area) of the symbol determined under the control of the main board, the sub board, Since the out-of-frame area is opened so as to be visible, and the final symbol display area (new display area) is determined, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the secondary board takes the initiative in displaying the game result.

  According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the symbol display area can be expanded by opening the out-of-frame area while maintaining the basic display area in the control process for changing to the new display area. Thus, the display mode of the symbol combination can be controlled in various ways.

  Here, conventionally, the main board of the gaming machine has been provided with a capacity restriction (for example, in the main board ROM related to the spinning type gaming machine, the capacity of the control area is 4.5 KB or less and the data area The capacity of 3 KB or less) is limited in the control processing that can be executed by the main board within the range of such restrictions. Therefore, when the above-described control processing related to the change of the symbol display area is to be controlled by the main board (main board 409), the capacity of the control area of the main board is pressed, and the capacity limit may be exceeded in some cases. Is also possible. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, since the control relating to the expansion of the symbol display area can be performed not by the main board but by the sub board, the control has an additional effect on the capacity limitation of the main board. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing a control process for enhancing gameability without giving, that is, without exceeding the capacity constraint of the main board.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub-board performs “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is maintained”, the basic display area is maintained, so that the symbol determined by the main board is determined. Since the visual state for the display mode is not changed, even if a problem occurs in the symbol display area changing process due to a failure in a member such as the movable frame 522, only the basic display area will be displayed in subsequent games. It can always be displayed and can contribute to the availability of gaming machines.

(8) Eighth Features and Effects The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment allows the reel display device 520 (especially the movable frame 522) to be opened with a degree of opening of the out-of-frame area equal to or greater than “opening degree 2” (see [12-1]). By operating, the symbol display area can be changed from the old display area (basic display area 524a) in the normal mode to the new display area including the out-of-frame area of the basic display area 524a. When the change pattern is “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed” as described in [12-3-2], in the new display area after the change, the old display area (basic display area) While a part of the area is shielded from being visible to the player, the new display area is extended to the outside area (outside frame area) of the basic display area, and the symbols (outside frame patterns) located in the outside frame area are mostly Identifiable Since it is exposed, the number of symbols that can be easily identified by the player can be varied from the number of symbols that appear in the old display area.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment forms a new display area by partially shielding the old display area (basic display area) and visualizing the out-of-frame area in changing the symbol display area. It is possible to provide a novel symbol display mode that has not been realized in a gaming machine, and to contribute to the improvement of interest by preventing the player from getting bored.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the symbol display area, the basic display area is reduced, while the out-of-frame area is newly made visible. Since it is created as a region, it is possible to make the player feel the importance of the region outside the frame more strongly. In addition, by attracting the player's interest to the out-of-frame area strongly, it is possible to realize a novel gameability in which attention is paid to the out-of-frame area that has not been regarded as important in the past.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the symbol display area, the entire display area is not expanded by simply adding an area, but a part of the old display area is shielded. The total number of symbols that can be easily identified in the entire new display area can be adjusted. If the number of easily identifiable symbols in the new display area increases excessively, the player may not know what to pay attention to, and there is a risk of getting lost, but the slot machine 1 of this embodiment is By changing the symbol display area that destroys the old display area at an opening degree of 2 or higher, the number of symbols that can be easily identified is adjusted, and the player's attention is directed to an appropriate area in the game. be able to.

(9) Ninth Feature and Effect The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment allows the reel display device 520 (especially the movable frame 522) to be opened with the degree of opening of the outside frame area equal to or greater than “opening degree 2” (see [12-1]). By operating it, the new display area after the change can be exposed to the extent that the symbols (out-of-frame symbols) located in the newly opened outside-of-frame area can be generally recognized. When the change pattern of the area is “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed” as described in [12-3-2], the old display area ( While reducing the display lines in the (basic display area), it is possible to create a new display line (out-of-frame line) including the out-of-frame symbols.

  In other words, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment reduces the visible basic display area by changing the design display area, and creates a visible out-of-frame symbol in the external area of the basic display area. As a result, the predetermined line mode formed in the old display area (basic display area) is suppressed, and a new line mode can be added. Further, in the entire symbol display area, the line correspondence is made variable before and after the symbol display area is changed.

  According to such a slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce and create display lines in parallel, so that a symbol display area with a high degree of freedom can be formed. For example, the symbol display area shown in FIG. 113 is an area shape that did not exist in the conventional gaming machine, and in such a symbol display area with a high degree of freedom, there has been no conventional display line configuration. Such a novel configuration becomes possible. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to make a novel display mode for the symbol combination appearing on the display line, and to improve the game interest of the player.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the remaining display lines can be made important by reducing the display lines in the basic display area, and the display can be performed. The player's attention to the line can be increased. On the other hand, the out-of-frame line including the out-of-frame design can be made to feel more important because it is a newly created display line. Thus, it can be expected that an emphasis effect is given to each display line for each display line, which contributes to diversification of game play.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, since the reduction and expansion of the display lines can be realized, the total number of display lines in the symbol display area can be adjusted, and the game with high gameability Production can be performed. For example, it is possible to execute a game effect such that as the number of display lines in the basic display area is increased or the number of out-of-frame lines is increased, it can be expected to give some game privilege.

(10) Tenth Feature and Effect In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the change of the symbol display area is controlled by a sub board (for example, the effect control board 510) other than the main board (main board 409). 2 ”(refer to [12-1]) In the case of performing“ changing the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed ”as described in [12-3-2] with the degree of opening of the out-of-frame area above The display mode of the combination of symbols that can be recognizable from the player in the symbol display area while the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination that can appear on the active line in the symbol display region follows the control by the main board is The sub-board can be controlled predominantly. According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-board is on the effective line in the display mode of the symbols determined under the control of the main board (this is displayed in the basic display area). A game where the sub-board takes the initiative in displaying the game result, since the outside of the frame area is visibly opened and the final symbol display area (new display area) is determined without blocking the symbol combination. Machine can be provided.

  According to the slot machine 1 of this embodiment as described above, in the control process for changing to the new display area, a part of the basic display area (except for the active line) is shielded, while the symbol display area is opened by opening the out-of-frame area. Therefore, it is possible to realize a complicated pattern combination display mode under the control of the sub-board.

  Here, as described above, the main board of the gaming machine has conventionally been limited in capacity (for example, in the main board ROM related to the spinning type gaming machine, the capacity of the control area is 4.5 KB or less. And the capacity of the data area is 3 KB or less), and the control processing that can be executed by the main board within the range of such restrictions is limited. Therefore, when the above-described control processing related to the change of the symbol display area is to be controlled by the main board (main board 409), the capacity of the control area of the main board is pressed, and the capacity limit may be exceeded in some cases. Is also possible. However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, since the control related to the change of the symbol display area can be controlled not by the main board but by the sub board, the capacity of the main board can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in the processing load on the main board. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing high gameability without exceeding the restrictions.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub-board performs “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed”, a part of the basic display area is shielded, and therefore, determined by the main board. A part of the symbol display mode (the symbol display displayed in accordance with the stop position of the reel) is shielded. However, since the area and symbols to be shielded are limited to those other than the active line, the important game result information such as the display result of the symbol combination based on the winning combination is not affected by the sub-board, and the player Shown in Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, even if a situation in which the control relating to the change of the symbol display area cannot be performed occurs, the symbol combination based on the winning combination cannot be displayed. Without affecting the processing by the main substrate.

(11) Other Features and Effects As another characteristic configuration, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a symbol display area as described in part in the description of the reel display device 520 in [9-1]. You may have an irradiation means which can irradiate. This irradiating means may be realized, for example, by providing a transmissive liquid crystal capable of emitting light on the rear surface side of the transparent plate 214a of the door-shaped front member 200 or the front surface side of the reel display area 520. A backlight or the like realized by providing a light emitting member capable of irradiating the front surface of a predetermined reel from the back surface of the reel band 321 may be used. Further, the irradiation by the irradiation unit may be controlled by the main board 409 (particularly the CPU 1110), or may be from a part other than the main board 409 (for example, the effect control board 510).

  In the case of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment having such an irradiating means, it is preferable not to perform an effect of emphasizing a specific symbol combination regardless of whether or not the symbol display area is changed, but not a specific symbol combination. You may perform the effect which emphasizes the design of a part (For example, 1 to 2 designs of 3 designs which comprise a line are also included). By performing the effect of emphasizing this specific symbol, the display mode of the symbol combination (or symbol) in the symbol display area can be suggested. Specifically, for example, when two watermelon symbols stopped in the symbol display area are emphasized by the backlight, even if the three watermelon symbols constituting the watermelon symbol alignment are not emphasized, It can be suggested that a combination of watermelon symbols is displayed.

  Further, the effect of emphasizing a specific symbol is not limited to the above-described emphasis effect by the backlight. In addition, for example, a sound effect in which a symbol (or symbol combination) to be emphasized is notified by sound (voice), an effect effect by operation of a movable accessory, or a symbol ( Alternatively, it may be a color effect that suggests a combination of symbols) by an emission color of a window frame of the symbol display window 524 or the like. As an example of the color effect based on the emission color, when the window frame or the like is lit in green, the watermelon symbols are aligned, and when it is emitted in red, the cherry symbols are stopped in the symbol display area. Further, when green and red are alternately emitted, it may be suggested that either (or both) the cherry symbols or the watermelon symbols are stopped in the symbol display area. Further, the color effect based on the light emission color may be performed not only by the light emission of the window frame, but also by causing other light emitting components (for example, a decorative LED of the casing) to emit light. Further, as another example of the enhancement effect, a vibration device that vibrates in a manner capable of suggesting a display line (or display region) to be emphasized in the symbol display region may be provided.

  Furthermore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment may perform a specific symbol emphasis effect by the above-described irradiation means or the like when the specific mode of the symbol display area is changed. Specifically, for example, when the symbol display area is changed in an expanded manner, an effect of emphasizing a specific symbol displayed in the expanded symbol display area is performed. As illustrated in FIG. 60, in the expanded symbol display area, the number of symbols to be stopped and the number of display lines increase, so compared with the basic display area in the normal mode, It is assumed that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not such a symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and he / she is at a loss as to which symbol in the symbol display area should be noticed. According to the slot machine 1, in such a case, it is possible to notify / suggest a player of a symbol or a symbol combination that should be more noticed by performing an emphasis effect by the irradiation means on a specific symbol. Play a role in assisting the progress of the game and contribute to the improvement of the game entertainment.

  Further, when the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs the irradiation effect of irradiating the symbol display area, as described above, the slot machine 1 does not perform the irradiation effect in the form of “emphasizing a specific symbol”, but displays the symbol. When the area is changed (including from the start of the change to the lapse of a predetermined time after the change is completed), an irradiation effect may be performed to irradiate the symbol display area in a manner that does not make a difference to the specific area.

  Some conventional gaming machines illuminate the symbol display area, but conventional illumination has the effect of highlighting a specific area or combination of symbols, but only in places where the player is emphasized. Since the player is only interested in the game, the player's expectation for other areas or symbols may be lowered, and the enjoyment of the game result may be reduced.

  On the other hand, the “irradiation effect of the aspect that does not make a difference in a specific area” by the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment means an irradiation effect of an aspect different from the conventional irradiation method as described above. Corresponds to, for example, irradiating the entire surface of the symbol display area or the frame periphery of the symbol display area. According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is emphasized to the player that an operation specific to the slot machine 1 of changing the symbol display area is performed by performing the irradiation effect on the symbol display area in this way. Can increase the interest of the player.

  When the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment performs such irradiation effects, the irradiation method as seen in some conventional gaming machines, that is, a part of the symbol display area, or a specific symbol and symbol An irradiation method for irradiating the combination is not adopted. Such conventional irradiation has the effect of emphasizing and drawing attention to a specific area or design (symbol combination), but since the player is interested only in the emphasized location, it is applied to other areas or designs. The value will be relatively low. In addition, by emphasizing, important points regarding the display mode of symbols can be easily understood, so even if the player's interest is improved, it only lasts for a short period of time, and as a result, the enjoyment of the game result is reduced. There was a fear.

  On the other hand, according to the irradiation of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to suggest or clearly indicate the change of the symbol display area without concentrating the player's consciousness on the specific area. And it emphasizes the change of a symbol display area, and contributes to improving each effect described in (1)-(4).

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing the above-described irradiation effect, it is possible to make the player interested in the entire symbol display area and increase the player's enjoyment with respect to the game result. The effect can be expected. More specifically, when the symbol display area is moved or expanded, some change occurs because the identifiable symbols increase or the identifiable symbol location changes due to the change of the symbol display area. This can make the player feel this. And not only was the player newly motivated to explore where the newly added area is, and what kind of symbol combination would be displayed in that area, but it was not newly added. Since it is possible to feel the possibility that some symbol combination is displayed also in the area, it is possible to broaden the player's interest in the entire symbol display area and to increase interest and expectation for the game result.

  In the present embodiment, the slot machine 1 having the AT function has been described, but the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the AT machine. In addition, for example, an RT machine having RT (replay time) may be used, an ART machine that teaches the pressing order of small roles during RT, or no AT, RT, or ART. It may be a model (so-called bonus-based model). Further, although the bonus prepared in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is CB, other types of bonuses (for example, BB, RB, SB, etc.) may be prepared.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, medals are used as gaming values (game media) used for gaming, but gaming values used in gaming machines according to the present invention are not necessarily limited to medals. For example, it may be a game ball or electronic data corresponding to a game value.

  In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment described above as the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reel 301 (reels 301 a to 301 c) is an example of a plurality of rotatable reels with a plurality of symbols, and the main board 409. (Mainly CPU 1110) is an example of a lottery means for performing a lottery of a winning combination. The main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110) rotates a plurality of reels with a predetermined start operation as a trigger, and each of the plurality of rotating reels with a predetermined stop operation as a trigger based on a lottery result by a lottery means. This is an example of the reel control means for stopping at the stop position, and the symbol variation display device 300 performs actual driving related to the stop of the reel based on the control of the main board 409. In addition, the reel display device 520 is provided with a basic display area (for example, corresponding to the basic display area 524a) in which a part of each of the plurality of reels can be visually recognized, so that when the plurality of reels are stopped by the reel control unit, It is an example of a symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination in one or more predetermined line modes formed by connecting symbols on each reel made visible in the basic display area, and in particular, the movable frame 522 is operating. This corresponds to the “normal mode” state. Further, the effective line 523a is included in one or more predetermined line modes. In addition, the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) shields a part of the symbols in the basic display area and creates a visible symbol in the external area of the basic display area when a specific condition is satisfied. This is an example of a variable line control means for executing control for changing the line mode in the entire area visible to the player. The “specific condition” corresponds to a “frame variation condition” in which the movable frame 522 is moved. Specifically, the processing by the line variable control means is, for example, such that the effect control board 510 performs “change of the symbol display area in which the old display area is destroyed” at “openness 2” or higher. This corresponds to the process of operating the movable frame 522 (see [12-3-2]). At this time, a part of the symbols in the basic display area is made invisible and the symbols outside the frame are newly made visible. Therefore, the display mode in the basic display area can be reduced, and the display mode formed including the out-of-frame symbols can be added to change the line mode in the entire new display area.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 10 Clearance 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer main body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step 107 Installation Piece 108 mounting piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device main body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow bowl 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary medal storage box 111a medal full sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Protruding portion 112m-1 Protruding portion 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 Single slot button 206 MAX button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel Stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal cage 213 Return rod 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Supporting piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitting body 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixing member 219 Concave groove 300 Pattern change display device 301a Left reel 301b Middle reel 301c Right reel 302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right plate 307 Left side Plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel board 313 Cable 315 Detachment portion 316 Handles 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide portion 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 鍔 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge bracket 420a Fixing member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping region 420h Superposition region 420h Superposition region 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle port 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receptacle 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button-shaped panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Claw piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Engagement Stop hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member 502 Illumination device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 510 Effect control Substrate 512 Speaker 520 Reel display device 521 Frame member 521a Upper window 521b Lower window 521c Left side member 521d Right side member 522 Movable frames 522a, 522c, 522d, 522e Upper movable frame members 522b, 522f, 522g, 522h Moving frame member 523 Display frame drive motor 523a Upper movable frame drive motor 523b Lower movable frame drive motor 524 Graphic display window 524a Basic display area 525 Image display body 600 Upper bar 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start Ramp 610 Ramp 614 Ramp 623a Middle stage line 700 Notation connector 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hooking wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Knob 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotatable reels with a plurality of symbols;
Lottery means for lottery of winning roles;
Reel control means for rotating the plurality of reels in response to a predetermined start operation, and for stopping each of the plurality of rotating reels in a stop position based on a lottery result by the lottery means in response to a predetermined stop operation When,
By providing a basic display area in which a part of each of the plurality of reels can be visually recognized, when the plurality of reels are stopped by the reel control means, each of the reels made visible in the basic display area A symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination in one or more predetermined line forms formed by connecting the symbols;
When a specific condition is satisfied, by blocking a part of the symbols in the basic display area and creating a visible symbol in the external area of the basic display area, Line variable control means for executing control to change the line mode;
A gaming machine comprising: